WO2023005730A1 - 通信方法和通信装置 - Google Patents

通信方法和通信装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023005730A1
WO2023005730A1 PCT/CN2022/106433 CN2022106433W WO2023005730A1 WO 2023005730 A1 WO2023005730 A1 WO 2023005730A1 CN 2022106433 W CN2022106433 W CN 2022106433W WO 2023005730 A1 WO2023005730 A1 WO 2023005730A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
measurement
reference signal
terminal device
indication information
criterion
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/106433
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
李晨琬
陈磊
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023005730A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023005730A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/02—Arrangements for optimising operational condition
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/10—Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the communication field, and more specifically, to a communication method and a communication device.
  • 5G fifth generation mobile communication
  • the Internet of Things As a component of 5G, the Internet of Things (IoT) is experiencing rapid growth in market demand.
  • M2M Machine to Machine
  • M2M devices are mostly small, battery-powered systems, such as smart meter reading systems, which need to periodically monitor and report the usage of water, electricity, and gas.
  • RedCap reduced capability, reduced capability
  • 5G RedCap (reduced capability, reduced capability) terminal is also an IoT device, which has low power consumption and low complexity requirements. Therefore, in the Internet of Things system, it is necessary to design a new solution to enable terminal devices to achieve lower power consumption.
  • the present application provides a communication method and a communication device.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the first reference signal type measured by the terminal equipment, and the terminal equipment references the first reference signal type according to the first indication information.
  • the signal is measured to obtain a first measurement value, and the terminal device reports the relationship to the network device after determining that the relationship between the first measurement value and the first threshold satisfies the first criterion.
  • the terminal device in the connected state can also judge and report the first criterion.
  • the network device may instruct the terminal device to enter the measurement relaxation state, so that the terminal device realizes low power consumption in the connected state.
  • a communication method including: a terminal device receives first indication information sent by a network device, the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to perform a first determination on a reference signal of a first reference signal type, and the first Determining whether the relationship between the measured value of the reference signal of the first reference signal type and the first threshold satisfies the first criterion; the terminal device conducts the reference signal of the first reference signal type according to the first indication information in the connected state. measuring to obtain a first measurement value; the terminal device sends second indication information to the network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the relationship between the first measurement value and the first threshold satisfies the first criterion.
  • the terminal device By sending the first indication information to the terminal device, the terminal device knows which reference signal is used for measurement, and then judges whether the relationship between the measured first measurement value and the first threshold meets the first criterion, so that the terminal device in the connected state realizes the measurement Determine whether the first criterion is satisfied, and report the measurement result to the network device.
  • the first criterion may include a stationary criterion and/or a not at cell edge criterion.
  • the first criterion can be used to evaluate the approximate location and mobility information of the terminal device.
  • the first indication information is sent by the network device to the terminal device through broadcast or dedicated signaling, and the first indication information may be indicated in the form of a newly defined measurement event in measurement configuration information or reported configuration information.
  • the first indication information sent by the network device to the terminal device may be indicated in various forms, and a flexible indication method is provided.
  • the first reference signal type may include a synchronization signal block SSB and/or a channel state information reference signal CSI-RS.
  • the terminal device receives third indication information sent by the network device, where the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to enter the measurement relaxation state in the connected state, and the terminal device is in the measurement relaxation state. Entering the measurement relaxation state in the connected state can reduce the power consumption of the terminal device in the connected state.
  • the third indication information may also include timer information, where the timer information is used to indicate the time period for the terminal device to enter the measurement relaxation state.
  • the terminal equipment performs measurement relaxation. If the terminal device determines that the first criterion is not satisfied during the running of the timer, or if the timer expires, the terminal device stops performing measurement relaxation. This method strengthens the control of the network device on the terminal device, so that all measurement relaxations are performed under the control of the network device.
  • the network device may also actively send a stop or start measurement relaxation indication to the terminal device. Realized the controllability of network equipment.
  • the first indication information is also used to indicate the first threshold.
  • the first threshold may be indicated in the first indication information in the connected state.
  • the first threshold may be the threshold in the idle state, and when entering the connected state, the first threshold in the idle state is also used by default.
  • the first indication information indicates offset information, and the first threshold is equivalent to the sum of the idle state threshold and the offset.
  • the first measurement value is a measurement value obtained by the terminal device measuring a reference signal of the first reference signal type of the serving cell, or, the first measurement value is a measurement value obtained by the terminal device measuring the reference signal of the first reference signal type of the neighboring cell.
  • the network device After the network device receives the measurement result, it can evaluate the approximate location and mobility information of the terminal device, and then judge whether to enable the terminal device to perform connection state measurement relaxation, so that the network device can indicate according to the communication status of the terminal device, realizing the network device controlling.
  • the third indication information may include specific measurement relaxation content, for example, relax the measurement period, perform measurement with a longer period, and measure the cell Relax, do not measure some cells, relax the frequency of measurement, do not measure some frequencies.
  • the third instruction information indicates specific measurement relaxation content, which can enable the terminal device to flexibly determine the measurement relaxation content according to the instruction of the network device, realize accurate measurement relaxation, and also realize controllability of the network device.
  • the first indication information or the third indication information is also used to indicate the measurement configuration of the reference signal of the first reference signal type in the measurement relaxation state
  • the first The measurement configuration of the reference signal of the reference signal type in the measurement relaxation state includes a first measurement period of the reference signal of the first reference signal type in the measurement relaxation state.
  • the first indication information is also used to indicate the measurement configuration in which the reference signal of the first reference signal type is not in the measurement relaxation state, and the measurement configuration in which the reference signal of the first reference signal type is not in the measurement relaxation state includes the first reference The reference signal of signal type is not in the second measurement cycle in the measurement relaxation state.
  • the first measurement period is greater than the second measurement period. It can make the terminal equipment measure the reference signal with a longer period in the measurement relaxation state, which saves the power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • the network device may indicate to the terminal device that the measurement period is relaxed by using the configuration information of the measurement reference signal, for example, configuring two or more sets of measurement configuration information for the measurement reference signal, wherein each set of measurement configuration information The measurement periods are different, and when the terminal device satisfies the first criterion or enters the measurement relaxation state, the network device may instruct the terminal device to use different reference signal measurement configurations.
  • the network device can configure two sets of SMTC (SS/PBCH block measurement timing configuration, SSB measurement timing configuration) configurations for the terminal device. The first SMTC configuration is used when the measurement is not relaxed, and the second SMTC configuration is used when the measurement is relaxed. .
  • the network device can also configure similar measurement configuration information for the CSI-RS. Specifically, two sets of SMTC configurations correspond to one measurement frequency, or cell, or measurement object.
  • the first determination is used to determine whether the relationship between the measured value of the reference signal of the first reference signal type and the first threshold satisfies the first criterion, including: the first determining that a relationship between a measured value of a reference signal of a first reference signal type and a first threshold satisfies a first criterion within a first time, or,
  • the first determination is used to determine that the relationship between the measured value of the reference signal of the first reference signal type and the first threshold does not satisfy the first criterion within the second time.
  • the determination whether the relationship between the measured value of the first reference signal core and the first threshold satisfies or does not satisfy the first criterion requires a certain period of time before the relationship can be determined.
  • the first time is greater than or equal to the second time.
  • the second indication information sent by the terminal device to the network device may simultaneously report the measurement results of n times of measurements performed by the terminal device on the serving cell during one sending and reporting process , and also report the measurement results of the terminal device's measurement of the m neighboring cells at the same time.
  • the terminal device may leave the relaxed measurement state by itself or according to the instructions of the network device when it determines that certain conditions are met.
  • the terminal device may leave the measurement relaxation state.
  • the second time is shorter than the duration for which the terminal device judges that the relationship between the first measurement value and the first threshold satisfies the first criterion, that is, the first time. Setting the second time to be greater than the first time can enable the terminal device to leave the measurement relaxation state more quickly and ensure the performance of the terminal device in the connected state.
  • a communication method including: a network device sends first indication information to a terminal device, where the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to perform a first determination on a reference signal of a first reference signal type, and the first determination It is used to determine whether the relationship between the measured value of the reference signal of the first reference signal type and the first threshold satisfies the first criterion; the network device receives the second indication information sent by the terminal device, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first measurement The relationship between the value and the first threshold satisfies a first criterion.
  • the terminal device By sending the first indication information to the terminal device, the terminal device knows which reference signal is used for measurement, and then judges whether the relationship between the measured first measurement value and the first threshold meets the first criterion, so that the terminal device in the connected state realizes the measurement Determine whether the first criterion is satisfied, and report the measurement result to the network device.
  • the first criterion may include a stationary criterion and/or a not at cell edge criterion.
  • the first criterion can be used to evaluate the approximate location and mobility information of the terminal device.
  • the first indication information is sent by the network device to the terminal device through broadcast or dedicated signaling, and the first indication information may also be indicated in the form of a newly defined measurement event in the measurement configuration.
  • the first reference signal type may include a synchronization signal block SSB and/or a channel state information reference signal CSI-RS.
  • the network device sends third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to enter the measurement relaxation state in the connected state, and the terminal device In the measurement relaxation state, the power consumption of the terminal device in the connection state can be reduced.
  • the first indication information is also used to indicate the first threshold.
  • the first threshold may be indicated in the first indication information in the connected state.
  • the first threshold may be the threshold in the idle state, and when entering the connected state, the first threshold in the idle state is also used by default.
  • the first indication information indicates offset information, and the first threshold is equivalent to the sum of the idle state threshold and the offset.
  • the first measurement value is a measurement value obtained by the terminal device measuring a reference signal of the first reference signal type of the serving cell, or, the first measurement value is a measurement value obtained by the terminal device measuring the reference signal of the first reference signal type of the neighboring cell.
  • the third indication information may include specific measurement relaxation content, for example, relax the measurement period, perform measurement with a longer period, and measure the cell Relax, do not measure some cells, relax the frequency of measurement, do not measure some frequencies.
  • the first indication information or the third indication information is also used to indicate the measurement configuration of the reference signal of the first reference signal type in the measurement relaxation state
  • the first The measurement configuration of the reference signal of the reference signal type in the measurement relaxation state includes a first measurement period of the reference signal of the first reference signal type in the measurement relaxation state.
  • the first indication information is also used to indicate the measurement configuration in which the reference signal of the first reference signal type is not in the measurement relaxation state, and the measurement configuration in which the reference signal of the first reference signal type is not in the measurement relaxation state includes the first reference The reference signal of signal type is not in the second measurement cycle in the measurement relaxation state.
  • the first measurement period is greater than the second measurement period. It can make the terminal equipment measure the reference signal with a longer period in the measurement relaxation state, which saves the power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • the network device may indicate to the terminal device that the measurement period is relaxed by using the configuration information of the measurement reference signal, for example, configuring two or more sets of measurement configuration information for the measurement reference signal, wherein each set of measurement configuration information The measurement periods are different, and when the terminal device satisfies the first criterion or enters the measurement relaxation state, the network device may instruct the terminal device to use different reference signal measurement configurations.
  • the network device can configure two sets of SMTC (SS/PBCH block measurement timing configuration, SSB measurement timing configuration) configurations for the terminal device. The first SMTC configuration is used when the measurement is not relaxed, and the second SMTC configuration is used when the measurement is relaxed. .
  • the network device may also configure similar measurement configuration information for the CSI-RS signal.
  • the first determination is used to determine whether the relationship between the measured value of the reference signal of the first reference signal type and the first threshold satisfies the first criterion, including: the first determining that a relationship between a measured value of a reference signal of a first reference signal type and a first threshold satisfies a first criterion within a first time, or,
  • the first determination is used to determine that the relationship between the measured value of the reference signal of the first reference signal type and the first threshold does not satisfy the first criterion within the second time.
  • the determination of whether the relationship between the measured value of the first reference signal core and the first threshold meets or does not meet the first criterion requires a certain period of time before the relationship can be determined.
  • the first time is greater than or equal to the second time.
  • the third instruction information indicates specific measurement relaxation content, which can enable the terminal device to flexibly determine the measurement relaxation content according to the instruction of the network device, realize accurate measurement relaxation, and also realize controllability of the network device.
  • the second indication information sent by the terminal device received by the network device may simultaneously report n measurements of the serving cell by the terminal device during one sending and reporting process As a result, the measurement results of the terminal equipment's measurement of m neighboring cells can also be reported at the same time.
  • the network device After the network device receives the measurement results, it can evaluate the approximate location and mobility information of the terminal device, and then judge whether to enable the terminal device to perform connection state measurement relaxation, so that the network device can give instructions according to the communication status of the terminal device, realizing the network device of control.
  • a communication device including a unit for performing the steps of the communication method in the first aspect and its implementation manner.
  • the communication device is a communication chip
  • the communication chip may include an input circuit or interface for sending information or data, and an output circuit or interface for receiving information or data.
  • the communication device is a communication device (eg, a terminal device, etc.), and the communication chip may include a transmitter for sending information, and a receiver for receiving information or data.
  • the communication chip may include a transmitter for sending information, and a receiver for receiving information or data.
  • a communication device including a unit for performing the steps of the communication method in the above second aspect and its implementation manner.
  • the communication device is a communication chip
  • the communication chip may include an input circuit or interface for sending information or data, and an output circuit or interface for receiving information or data.
  • the communication device is a communication device (for example, a network device, etc.), and the communication chip may include a transmitter for sending information, and a receiver for receiving information or data.
  • the communication chip may include a transmitter for sending information, and a receiver for receiving information or data.
  • a communication device including a processor and a memory, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device executes the above-mentioned first
  • processors there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory may be separated from the processor
  • the communication device further includes a transmitter (transmitter) and a receiver (receiver).
  • a computer program product includes: a computer program (also
  • code when the computer program is executed, it causes the computer to execute the communication method in the first aspect or the second aspect and its various implementations.
  • a computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also
  • a communication system includes: at least one of the third aspects described in any one
  • a device and a device according to any one of the fourth aspect are identical to the fourth aspect.
  • a chip system including a memory and a processor, the memory is used to store computer
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication of the chip system installed
  • the device executes the communication method in the first aspect or the second aspect and various implementations thereof.
  • the chip system may include an input circuit or interface for sending information or data, and an input circuit or interface for receiving
  • An output circuit or interface for information or data for information or data.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a system architecture of an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an example of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of another example of the communication method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of another example of the communication method of the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram of another example of the communication method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of an example of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of another example of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: Global System of Mobile communication (Global System of Mobile communication, GSM) system, code division multiple access (Code Division Multiple Access, CDMA) system, broadband code division multiple access (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, WCDMA) system, General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, LTE Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) system, LTE Time Division Duplex (TDD), Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS), Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) communication system, the fifth generation (5th Generation, 5G ) system or New Radio (New Radio, NR), etc.
  • GSM Global System of Mobile communication
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • GPRS General Packet Radio Service
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • FDD Frequency Division Duplex
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
  • WiMAX Worldwide Interoperability for
  • the terminal equipment in the embodiment of the present application may refer to user equipment, access terminal, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent, or user device.
  • the terminal equipment can also be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (Session Initiation Protocol, SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (Wireless Local Loop, WLL) station, a personal digital processing (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), a wireless communication Functional handheld devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, vehicle-mounted devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in 5G networks or terminal devices in the evolved public land mobile network (Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN) etc., which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • SIP Session Initiation Protocol
  • WLL Wireless Local Loop
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • the access network device in the embodiment of the present application refers to a radio access network (radio access network, RAN) node (or device) that connects a terminal to a wireless network, and may also be called a base station.
  • radio access network radio access network
  • RAN radio access network
  • examples of some RAN nodes are: evolving Node B (gNB), transmission reception point (transmission reception point, TRP), evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), radio network controller (radio network controller, RNC), node B (Node B, NB), base station controller (base station controller, BSC), base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB) , base band unit (base band unit, BBU), or wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, Wifi) access point (access point, AP), etc.
  • gNB Node B
  • TRP transmission reception point
  • eNB evolved Node B
  • the access network device may include a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU) node, or a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node.
  • the RAN equipment including the CU node and the DU node separates the protocol layer of the eNB in the long term evolution (LTE) system, and the functions of some protocol layers are placed in the centralized control of the CU, and some or all of the functions of the protocol layer are left Distributed in the DU, the CU centrally controls the DU.
  • the access network device may also be a reader device.
  • the core network equipment in the embodiment of the present application refers to the collective name of various functional entities used to manage users, data transmission and base station configuration on the network side, including AMF, UPF, SMF and so on. Etc., the embodiment of the present application is not limited.
  • FIG. 1 is a system architecture of an embodiment of the present application.
  • a terminal device is located within the coverage of one or more cells (carriers) provided by a base station, and there may be one or more cells serving the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can work in the carrier aggregation (Carrier Aggregation, CA) transmission mode, or in the dual connectivity (Dual Connectivity, DC) transmission mode, or in the coordinated multi-point transmission mode Work.
  • carrier aggregation Carrier Aggregation, CA
  • DC Dual Connectivity
  • at least one cell provides more than one system parameter and simultaneously provides radio resources for the terminal equipment.
  • FIG. 2 is an example of a communication method in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in the figure, the method 200 includes:
  • the network device sends first indication information to the terminal device.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the first reference signal type. Further, the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to perform a first determination on the reference signal of the first reference signal type, and the first determination is used to determine the difference between the measured value of the reference signal of the first reference signal type and the first threshold Whether the relationship satisfies the first criterion.
  • the first indication information is also used to indicate the first threshold, or offset information. It should be noted that if the first indication information is used to indicate offset information, it is possible that the terminal device has received the threshold information once in the idle state or inactive state, and the terminal device combines the offset information based on the threshold information The information is used for subsequent judgments.
  • the first threshold may be the first threshold reconfigured when the terminal device enters the connected state.
  • the first threshold may be a threshold when the terminal device is in an idle state, and the terminal device uses the threshold when it is in an idle state by default and continues to use it for judgment.
  • the first reference signal type may include a synchronization signal block (Synchronization Signal Block, SSB), and a channel state information reference signal (Channel State Information-Reference Signal, CSI-RS).
  • SSB Synchronization Signal Block
  • CSI-RS Channel State Information-Reference Signal
  • the terminal device measures the SSB signal, and in the connected state, the terminal device can measure the SSB signal, and the terminal device can also measure the CSI-RS signal.
  • the network device sends first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate a first reference signal type.
  • the network device may also separately send the first threshold information to the terminal device in information other than the first indication information, where the first threshold information is used to indicate the first threshold corresponding to the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information. a threshold.
  • the network device may not send the first threshold information to the terminal device, and the terminal device defaults to the first threshold. For example, in the connected state, the terminal device receives the first indication information sent by the network device, and the first indication information indicates that the first reference signal type is an SSB signal.
  • the terminal device If the terminal device does not receive the first threshold information, the terminal device defaults to using The threshold corresponding to the SSB signal in the idle state; for another example, in the connected state, the terminal device receives the first indication information sent by the network device, the first indication information indicates that the first reference signal type is an SSB signal, and the terminal device also receives The first threshold information sent by the network device, the terminal device uses the first threshold indicated by the first threshold information to judge whether the measured value measured using the SSB signal meets the first criterion; for another example, in the connected state, the terminal device receives The first indication information sent by the network device, the first indication information indicates that the first reference signal type is a CSI-RS signal, and the terminal device also receives the first threshold information sent by the network device, then the terminal device uses the first threshold information to indicate The first threshold value is used to determine whether the measured value measured using the CSI-RS signal satisfies the first criterion. It should be noted that the first threshold information may be included in a system message, and the
  • the network device sends a piece of first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate a reference signal type and a threshold corresponding to the reference signal type.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a reference signal type and a threshold corresponding to the reference signal type.
  • multiple fields are predefined, each field corresponds to a reference signal type, each field corresponds to a piece of first indication information, and the value of the field is a threshold value of its corresponding reference signal type.
  • two fields are predefined, field A and field B.
  • Field A corresponds to the SSB signal
  • field B corresponds to the CSI-RS signal.
  • the terminal device receives a first indication information
  • the first indication information is located in field A, then the The first indication information is used to indicate that the SSB signal is used for measurement.
  • the value of field A is the threshold corresponding to the SSB signal.
  • the terminal device uses the threshold corresponding to field A to determine whether the measurement value measured using the SSB signal meets the first
  • the network device sends two or more first indication information to the terminal device, where each first indication information is used to indicate a reference signal type and a threshold corresponding to the reference signal type.
  • first indication information is used to indicate a reference signal type and a threshold corresponding to the reference signal type.
  • two fields are predefined, field A and field B.
  • Field A corresponds to the SSB signal
  • field B corresponds to the CSI-RS signal.
  • the terminal device receives two first indication information, which are respectively located in field A and field B, the terminal The device may select one of the two reference signal types indicated by the first indication information to determine the first criterion.
  • the terminal device uses the threshold corresponding to field A to judge whether the measured value measured using the SSB signal meets the first criterion; when the terminal device chooses to use the CSI-RS signal, the terminal device uses the threshold corresponding to field B.
  • the threshold value of is used to determine whether the measurement value measured using the CSI-RS signal satisfies the first criterion.
  • the first indication information when the terminal device is in the connected state, the first indication information may be sent separately through broadcast or dedicated signaling, and the dedicated signaling may be a radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) reconfiguration message, or media access control (Medium Access Control, MAC) control element (Control Element, CE) MAC CE and other messages, which are not particularly limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • MAC Media Access Control
  • CE Control Element
  • the first indication information when the terminal device is in the connected state, the first indication information may be included in the measurement configuration information or the reporting configuration information, and the content indicated by the first indication information may be reported based on event triggering or periodic reporting The events are defined in the escalation list.
  • the first indication information may also be carried in an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information may be an implicit indication, for example, when the terminal device is in the connected state, all the measurement configuration information received by the terminal device indicates that the terminal When the device uses the SSB signal for measurement or reporting, the terminal device does not receive the first indication information but uses the SSB signal to perform the measurement for the first determination by default, or, when the terminal device is in the connected state, the measurement received by the terminal device All of the configuration information indicates that when the terminal device uses the CSI-RS signal to perform measurement or report, the terminal device does not receive the first indication information but uses the CSI-RS signal to perform measurement for the first determination by default.
  • the SSB signal is used by default to perform the measurement for the first determination, and the network device does not need to send the first indication information to indicate the type of the first reference signal.
  • the first indication information is received, the default SSB signal is not used to perform the measurement of the first determination.
  • the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information is used for the first determination. A judgmental measurement.
  • the network device broadcasts first indication information to the terminal device.
  • the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information is an SSB signal.
  • the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information is a CSI-RS signal.
  • the measurement may be continued according to the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information received in the idle state.
  • the first criterion may include a stationary criterion and a not-at-the-cell-edge criterion. It should be noted that the stationary criterion and the not-at-the-cell-edge criterion can evaluate the approximate location and mobility information of the terminal device to a certain extent.
  • the relationship between the first measured value and the first threshold (or the offset of the first threshold) satisfies the static criterion, then the relationship between the first measured value of the reference signal of the first reference signal type and the first threshold satisfies the following relation:
  • For the first reference signal type is SSB signal:
  • S SearchDeltaP is the first threshold corresponding to the SSB signal, that is, the threshold evaluation criterion is used when the SSB signal is used for measurement.
  • Srxlev is the reference signal receiving power (Reference Signal Receiving Power, RSRP) quality of the current serving cell, that is, the first measurement value, and Srxlev Ref is the reference RSRP quality of the current serving cell.
  • RSRP Reference Signal Receiving Power
  • the terminal device judges that the first measured value of the SSB signal and the first The relationship between the thresholds satisfies the static criterion.
  • the specific name of the first time may be TSearchDeltaP or Tin, and the name of the first time is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first time may be a maintenance time configured by the network device to the terminal device to satisfy the static criterion.
  • the first time may be the time configured by the network device to the terminal device in an idle state.
  • the first time may also be the time configured by the network device to the terminal device in the connected state.
  • the first time when the network device configures the terminal device in the idle state and the connected state may be the same or different.
  • the terminal device may use the first time configured in the idle state if the network device does not configure the first time to the terminal device in the connected state or the network device instructs the terminal device to use the configuration in the idle state or broadcast.
  • the network device can also configure the terminal device with a second time for the maintenance time that does not meet the static criterion, which is used for the terminal device to judge whether to leave the measurement relaxation state.
  • the specific name of the second time can be Tout, which is not discussed in this application. Do limited. The present application will describe the second time below, and details will not be repeated here.
  • the first time may be greater than the second time, so that the measurement relaxation state can be left more quickly and the performance of the terminal device in the connected state can be guaranteed.
  • the first time may also be equal to the second time, or the first time may be less than the second time, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first time of the maintenance time meeting the static criterion and the second maintenance time not meeting the static criterion may be configured through an RRC message.
  • the first time of the maintenance time that meets the static criterion and the second time of the maintenance time that does not meet the static criterion can be configured through the report configuration in the measurement configuration, that is, the network device can send the first time and the second time to the terminal device at the same time.
  • the configuration information of the second time specifically, a manner in which the network device simultaneously configures the first time and the second time to the terminal device may be that the first time and the second time are two trigger times of a measurement event.
  • the terminal device sets Srxlev of the camping cell or the serving cell as Srxlev Ref .
  • the third time is indicated by the network device to the terminal device.
  • the third time is defaulted by the terminal device.
  • the third time may be the same as the first time or the second time.
  • For the first reference signal type is a CSI-RS signal:
  • S SearchDeltaPCSI is the first threshold indicated by the first indication information received in the connected state
  • S SearchDeltaP is the threshold received when the idle state or the inactive state
  • the threshold is the threshold of the SSB signal
  • the offset CSI is the offset received in the connected state.
  • the name of the threshold value and the offset value in the embodiment of the present application is only an example of a name, and other names may also be used, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the relationship between the first measured value and the first threshold (or the offset of the first threshold) satisfies the not-at-the-cell-edge criterion, then the relationship between the first measured value and the first threshold satisfies the following relationship:
  • For the first reference signal type is SSB signal:
  • S searchThresholdQ is the first threshold
  • S SearchThresholdQ is also the first threshold
  • Srxlev is the RSRP quality of the current serving cell
  • Squal is the current serving cell
  • the reference RSRQ quality of the zone is the reference RSRQ quality of the zone.
  • For the first reference signal type is a CSI-RS signal:
  • S SearchThresholdP and S SearchThresholdQ are the thresholds received when idle state or inactive state
  • the threshold is the threshold value of SSB signal
  • offset CSI is the offset amount received when connected state
  • S SearchDeltaPCSI and S SearchThresholdQCSI are the first thresholds indicated by the first indication information received in the connected state.
  • the threshold received in the idle state is the threshold broadcast in the system message.
  • the first judgment is made according to the threshold value of the broadcasted SSB signal.
  • the network device may indicate the terminal device to measure the reference The signal type is SSB signal or CSI-RS signal.
  • the threshold value of the SSB signal in the idle state can be extended, or the first threshold value of the SSB signal can be re-indicated.
  • the offset amount may be indicated based on the threshold of the SSB signal in the idle state, or the first threshold of the CSI-RS signal may be re-indicated, which is not particularly limited in the present application.
  • the network device may also instruct the terminal device whether the measurement meets other criteria, which is not limited in this application.
  • the other criterion may assist the network device in judging whether to make the terminal device enter the measurement relaxed state.
  • the terminal device measures the reference signal of the first reference signal type according to the first indication information, so as to acquire a first measurement value.
  • the terminal device receives the first indication information, determines the first reference signal type used for the first determination, and the terminal device measures the reference signal of the first reference signal type.
  • the terminal device may perform n measurements on the serving cell, the n measurements may be arranged according to the measurement time, and the n is greater than or equal to 1.
  • the terminal device can measure m neighboring cells of the serving cell, where m is greater than or equal to 1.
  • the terminal device sends second indication information to the network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the relationship between the first measurement value and the first threshold satisfies the first criterion.
  • the second indication information is sent to the network device as a separate signaling, which may be sent to the network device through a terminal equipment assistance information (UEAssisitance Information) message, or may be sent to the network device through MAC CE information.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate that the relationship between the first measurement value and the first threshold satisfies the first criterion.
  • the terminal device may perform at least n measurements on the serving cell, and report the measurement results satisfying the first criterion. , the n measurements may be sorted according to the measurement time.
  • the terminal device may also perform measurements on m neighboring cells, and report the measurement results satisfying the first criterion.
  • the second indication information is sent to the network device in the measurement report of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may perform n measurements on the serving cell, and report the measurement results satisfying the first criterion.
  • the n measurements may be sorted according to the time of measurement.
  • the terminal device may also perform m neighboring cells, and report the measurement results satisfying the first criterion.
  • the terminal device reports the measurement results of n serving cells, and the measurement results of the n serving cells may be n results satisfying the criterion, or, after satisfying the criterion, the reported n measuring results include not Measurement results that meet the criteria.
  • the terminal device when the first criterion is met, reports the measurement results of m neighboring cells. Reporting the result can enable the network device to obtain more information about the terminal device to determine whether to allow the terminal to perform measurement relaxation.
  • the network device sends third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to enter a measurement relaxation state.
  • this step is optional. If the network device determines that the terminal device cannot enter the measurement relaxation state according to the second indication information, the network device may not send the third indication information to the terminal device.
  • the network device receives the second indication information.
  • the network device evaluates the approximate location and mobility information of the terminal device according to the measurement results of the serving cell in the second indication information.
  • the network device evaluates the approximate location and mobility information of the terminal device according to the second indication information. 2. Indicate the measurement result of the adjacent cell in the indication information, and judge whether the handover of the terminal equipment may occur.
  • the network device when it determines that the terminal device can perform measurement relaxation according to the second indication information, it sends third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to enter the measurement relaxation state.
  • the third indication information may be an RRC message, for example, an RRC reconfiguration message, or may be a MAC CE message, etc.
  • the content of the measurement relaxation may be frequency measurement relaxation, cell measurement relaxation, period measurement relaxation, and the like.
  • the third indication information may include: the frequency that needs to be measured, or the frequency that needs to be relaxed, or the cell that needs to be measured, or the cell that needs to be relaxed, or the cycle of the measurement (such as the cycle is seconds, minutes, hours, etc.) .
  • the terminal device after the terminal device enters the measurement relaxation state, it can relax the measurement cycle, and the network device can instruct the terminal device to relax the measurement cycle.
  • the original measurement cycle is once every 5 minutes, and enter the measurement relaxation state In the future, the measurement cycle can be measured once every 10 minutes.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device enters the measurement relaxation state, it may perform measurement relaxation on a certain frequency. As an example and not a limitation, the terminal device may not perform measurement on the frequency. After the terminal device enters the measurement relaxation state, it may perform measurement relaxation on a certain cell. As an example but not a limitation, the terminal device may not perform measurement on the cell.
  • the content for the terminal device to enter the measurement relaxation state may also be a combination of the above three types.
  • the network device may instruct the terminal device that for a certain cell A, the measurement period is once every 20 minutes, and for a certain cell A, the measurement period is once every 20 minutes.
  • the content of the measurement relaxation can be specifically indicated by the third indication information of the network device, or the third indication information can indicate to enter the measurement relaxation state and the terminal equipment side defaults to the measurement relaxation Content.
  • the third indication information may be an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the terminal device uses the SSB signal to perform measurement or the CSI-RS signal to perform measurement, and after receiving the third indication information, measurement relaxation can be performed on related measurements corresponding to the two types of reference signals.
  • the terminal device uses the SSB signal to perform measurement, receives the third indication information, and performs measurement relaxation on related measurement corresponding to the SSB signal.
  • the terminal device uses the CSI-RS signal to perform measurement, receives the third indication information, and performs measurement relaxation on related measurement corresponding to the CSI-RS signal.
  • the third indication information may carry a measurement ID, a measurement object ID, etc., and is used to indicate that the measurement object corresponding to the ID should be relaxed. It is also possible to indicate which reference signal the measurement relaxation is performed on.
  • the terminal device after the terminal device enters the measurement relaxed state in the connected state, when the first condition is met, the terminal device needs to leave the measurement relaxed state in time to ensure the mobility performance of the terminal device in the connected state.
  • the static criterion is used as an example to describe the first condition for the terminal device to leave the measurement relaxation state. It should be understood that the criterion of not being at the cell edge may also have a similar first condition for the terminal device to determine to leave the measurement relaxation state, which is not described in this embodiment of the present application, but is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first condition may be that the terminal device determines that the relationship between the first measurement value of the reference signal of the first reference signal type and the first threshold does not satisfy the stationary criterion formula
  • the maintenance time reaches the preset second time, that is, the relationship between the first measured value and the first threshold does not satisfy the formula of the stationary criterion within the second time, or the formula of the leaving condition of the stationary criterion is satisfied within the second time.
  • the value of the second time may be 0.
  • the departure condition for the stationary criterion will be described in method 400, and will not be repeated here.
  • the first condition may be that the terminal device receives indication information sent by the base station, where the indication information instructs the terminal device to leave the measurement relaxation state.
  • the first condition may be that the terminal device judges that the measurement relaxation time preset by the base station has been reached.
  • the base station when the base station sends the third indication information to the terminal device, it may carry timer information to indicate the measurement relaxation time of the terminal device. When the timer expires, the terminal device ends the measurement relaxation state.
  • the first condition may be a trigger condition for terminal equipment to reuse certain events, such as the trigger condition for measurement reporting events defined in 3GPP protocols such as A3, A4, and A5 .
  • the trigger condition for measurement reporting events defined in 3GPP protocols such as A3, A4, and A5 .
  • the following will briefly introduce events such as A3, A4, and A5.
  • the entry condition A3-1 of the A3 event satisfies the formula:
  • Mn is the measurement result of the adjacent cell
  • Ofn is the specific offset amount realized by the reference signal measurement of the adjacent cell
  • Ocn is the cell-specific offset amount of the adjacent cell
  • Mp is the measurement result of the serving cell
  • Ofp is the measurement object of the serving cell Specific offset amount
  • Ocp is the cell-specific offset amount of the serving cell
  • Hys is the hysteresis amount
  • Off is the event offset amount.
  • the entry condition A4-1 of the A4 event satisfies the formula:
  • Thresh is the threshold of the A4 event.
  • Other definitions are the same as above.
  • the entry condition A5-1 of the A5 event satisfies the formula:
  • Thresh1 and Thresh2 are the thresholds of the event, and other definitions are the same as above.
  • the events A3, A4, and A5 may be measurement events for switching configurations, or may be measurement events applicable to other situations, which are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device when the measurement result of the terminal device satisfies the formula defined by the entry condition of the A3 event, the terminal device can judge to leave the measurement relaxation state.
  • the measurement result may not satisfy the trigger time configuration (timetotrigger) configured by the network device in the A3 event, that is, only the formula condition in the A3 event is reused, and the trigger time in the A3 event is not reused.
  • the measurement result of the terminal device may only meet the formula condition of the A3 event, and the trigger time may use the time that does not meet the static criterion or the departure condition that meets the static criterion, that is, Tout or the second time, the cell quality measured by the terminal device , the formula defined by the A3 event is satisfied within the second time, then the measurement of relaxation can be stopped.
  • the measurement result may also meet the time threshold configured by the network device in the A3 event.
  • the first condition may be that the terminal device determines to end the measurement of the relaxed state after triggering a certain event report.
  • the measurement relaxation state ends by default.
  • the terminal device may end the measurement relaxation state by itself after the first condition is met, and the terminal device may also send indication information to the network device after the first condition is met, and the indication information indicates the network device that the terminal device meets the first condition .
  • the network device may decide whether to instruct the terminal device to end the measurement relaxation state. After the terminal device receives the instruction from the network device to end the measurement relaxation state, the terminal device ends the measurement relaxation state.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of this application can indicate the type of the first reference signal of the terminal device when the terminal device enters the connected state, so that the terminal device can measure the reference signal of the first reference signal type based on the indication, and obtain the first measurement Value, and judge whether the relationship between the first measurement value and the first threshold meets the first criterion, the terminal device reports the judgment result to the network device, and the network device indicates whether the terminal device enters the measurement relaxation state according to the result, when entering the measurement relaxation state , which can save the power consumption of the terminal equipment in the connected state.
  • Fig. 3 is another example of the communication method of the embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 3, the method 300 includes:
  • the network device sends first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first reference signal type.
  • the first reference signal type may include a synchronization signal block (Synchronization Signal Block, SSB), and a channel state information reference signal (Channel State Information-Reference Signal, CSI-RS).
  • SSB Synchronization Signal Block
  • CSI-RS Channel State Information-Reference Signal
  • the terminal device measures the SSB signal, and in the connected state, the terminal device can measure the SSB signal, and the terminal device can also measure the CSI-RS signal.
  • the first indication information may be used to indicate that the terminal device needs to perform a first determination on the reference signal of the first reference signal type, and the first determination is that the terminal device needs to determine the measured value and Whether the relationship between the first thresholds satisfies the first criterion.
  • the network device when the terminal device is in the connected state, the network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device.
  • the first indication information may be sent through a broadcast message or through dedicated signaling, for example, wireless Resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) reconfiguration message, or media access control (Medium Access Control, MAC) control element (Control Element, CE) MAC CE, etc., this embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
  • the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to measure the SSB signal, or measure the CSI-RS signal, or measure other possible types of reference signals. It should be noted that the measurement is used for the first determination .
  • all the measurement configuration information received by the terminal device indicates that the terminal device uses the SSB signal to perform measurement or report, but the terminal device does not receive the first indication information but
  • the SSB signal is used for the measurement for the first determination
  • all the measurement configuration information received by the terminal device indicates that the terminal device uses the CSI-RS signal for measurement or reporting.
  • the device does not receive the first indication information but uses the CSI-RS signal by default to perform measurement for the first determination. It should be noted that other measurement requirements are configured in the measurement configuration information.
  • the SSB signal when the terminal device is in the connected state, the SSB signal is used by default to perform the measurement for the first determination, and the network device does not need to send the first indication information to indicate the first reference signal type.
  • the network device when the terminal device is in an idle state or an inactive state, broadcasts first indication information to the terminal device.
  • the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information is an SSB signal
  • the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information is a CSI-RS signal.
  • the measurement may be continued according to the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information received in the idle state.
  • the terminal device side protocol is adaptively modified, so that the terminal device performs the measurement and determination of the first determination after receiving the first indication information, without special measurement configuration information to configure.
  • the first indication information may also be used to indicate the first threshold or offset information. It should be noted that if the first indication information is used to indicate the offset information, the terminal device may be in the idle state or In the inactive state, the threshold information has been received once, and the terminal device combines the offset information with the threshold information for subsequent judgment.
  • the first threshold may be a first threshold reconfigured when the terminal device enters the connected state.
  • the first threshold may be a threshold when the terminal device is in the idle state.
  • the network device when the terminal device is in the connected state, the network device sends first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information indicates the first threshold, or the first indication information indicates the value of the first threshold
  • the offset, the first threshold, or the first offset is the first threshold or offset related to the SSB signal
  • the terminal device defaults to the measurement of the SSB signal for the first determination, if the first threshold , or the offset of the first threshold is the first threshold or offset related to the CSI-RS, then the terminal device performs measurement on the CSI-RS signal for the first determination by default.
  • the terminal device receives the first indication information, determines the first reference signal type used for the first determination, and the terminal device measures the reference signal of the first reference signal type.
  • the terminal device can perform at least n measurements on the serving cell, where n is greater than or equal to 1.
  • the terminal device can measure at least m neighboring cells of the serving cell, where m is greater than or equal to 1.
  • the terminal device determines a result of the first determination according to the first measurement value and the first threshold.
  • the terminal device measures a reference signal of the first reference signal type to obtain a first measurement value, and the terminal device determines whether the relationship between the first measurement value and the first threshold satisfies a first criterion, and the first criterion may include static Criterion, not at the cell edge criterion. It should be noted that the stationary criterion and the not-at-the-cell-edge criterion can evaluate the approximate location and mobility information of the terminal device to a certain extent.
  • step S210 for the relationship between the first measured value and the first threshold to satisfy the first criterion, reference may be made to the description of step S210 in the method 200 , which will not be repeated here.
  • Network device Network device S340 the terminal device sends second indication information to the network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the result of the first determination.
  • the terminal device determines that the relationship between the first measurement amount and the first threshold satisfies the first criterion, and the terminal device sends second indication information to the network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first measurement amount and the first The relationship between the thresholds satisfies the first criterion.
  • the terminal device can perform n measurements on the serving cell, and report the measurement results satisfying the first criterion. The n measurements can be sorted according to the measurement time.
  • the terminal device may also perform measurements on m neighboring cells, and report the measurement results satisfying the first criterion.
  • the terminal device determines that the relationship between the first measurement amount and the first threshold does not satisfy the first criterion, and the terminal device sends second indication information to the network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first measurement amount and the first threshold A threshold relationship does not satisfy the first criterion.
  • the terminal device may perform n measurements on the serving cell and report the measurement results that do not meet the first criterion. The n measurements may be sorted according to the measurement time, Optionally, the terminal device may also measure m neighboring cells and report the measurement results that do not satisfy the first criterion, where m and n are positive integers.
  • the terminal device determines whether the relationship between the first measurement amount and the first threshold satisfies the first criterion, and the terminal device sends second indication information to the network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first measurement amount and the first threshold Whether the relationship between a threshold value satisfies the first criterion.
  • the terminal device may perform n measurements on the serving cell and report the n measurement results.
  • the terminal device may also perform measurements on multiple neighboring cells. And report whether the measurement results of the m neighboring cells with the best quality of the cell meet the first criterion, where m and n are positive integers.
  • the second indication information may be sent to the network device through a terminal device auxiliary information message, or may be sent to the network device through MAC CE information.
  • the terminal device may wait for the first time before sending the second indication information again, and the first time may be It is sent by the network device to the terminal device before, or it may be default or pre-configured by the terminal device or stipulated by the protocol.
  • the terminal device may also stop sending the second indication information to the network device after it still has not received the third indication information from the network equipment after reporting L times. The one sent by the terminal device may also be the default one of the terminal device. After the terminal device stops sending the second indication information, if it receives the first indication information again, the terminal device performs measurement again and sends the second indication information according to the judgment result.
  • the network device may configure the terminal device with the maximum number of reports L after meeting the first criterion.
  • the terminal device meets the first criterion, it starts to send the second indication information to the network device.
  • the sending cycle Configured for network devices or the default configuration for terminal devices. Specifically, if the relaxation indication information is received in the process of sending the configuration, the terminal device stops sending the second indication information, and starts to measure the relaxation.
  • the L times of measurement results reported by the terminal device may all satisfy the first criterion, or may not satisfy the first criterion.
  • the terminal device may start a timer, and when the timer expires, judge again whether the first criterion is satisfied, If it is satisfied, the second indication information is sent again, and if it is not satisfied, it does not need to be sent.
  • the timer may be previously sent by the network device to the terminal device, or may be specified by a protocol.
  • the terminal device may decide whether to perform measurement relaxation without notifying the network device.
  • the second indication information is sent to the network device, and whether measurement relaxation has been performed.
  • the network device sends third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to enter a measurement relaxation state.
  • this step is optional. If the network device determines that the terminal device cannot enter the measurement relaxation state according to the second indication information, the network device may not send the third indication information to the terminal device.
  • the network device receives the second indication information.
  • the network device evaluates the approximate location and mobility information of the terminal device according to the measurement results of the serving cell in the second indication information.
  • the network device evaluates the approximate location and mobility information of the terminal device according to the second indication information. 2. Indicate the measurement result of the adjacent cell in the indication information, and judge whether the handover of the terminal equipment may occur.
  • the network device when it determines that the terminal device can perform measurement relaxation according to the second indication information, it sends third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to enter the measurement relaxation state.
  • the third indication information may be an RRC message, for example, an RRC reconfiguration message, or may be a MAC CE message, etc.
  • the content of the measurement relaxation may be frequency measurement relaxation, cell measurement relaxation, period measurement relaxation, and the like.
  • the terminal device after the terminal device enters the measurement relaxation state, it can relax the measurement cycle, and the network device can instruct the terminal device to relax the measurement cycle.
  • the original measurement cycle is once every 5 minutes, and enter the measurement relaxation state In the future, the measurement cycle can be measured once every 10 minutes.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device enters the measurement relaxation state, it may perform measurement relaxation on a certain frequency. As an example and not a limitation, the terminal device may not perform measurement on the frequency. After the terminal device enters the measurement relaxation state, it may perform measurement relaxation on a certain cell. As an example but not a limitation, the terminal device may not perform measurement on the cell.
  • the content for the terminal device to enter the measurement relaxation state may also be a combination of the above three types.
  • the network device may instruct the terminal device that for a certain cell A, the measurement period is once every 20 minutes, and for a certain cell A, the measurement period is once every 20 minutes.
  • the content of the measurement relaxation can be specifically indicated by the third indication information of the network device, or the third indication information can indicate to enter the measurement relaxation state and the terminal equipment side defaults to the measurement relaxation Content.
  • the terminal device uses the SSB signal to perform measurement or the CSI-RS signal to perform measurement, and after receiving the third indication information, measurement relaxation can be performed on related measurements corresponding to the two types of reference signals.
  • the terminal device uses the SSB signal to perform measurement, receives the third indication information, and performs measurement relaxation on related measurement corresponding to the SSB signal.
  • the terminal device uses the CSI-RS signal to perform measurement, receives the third indication information, and performs measurement relaxation on related measurement corresponding to the CSI-RS signal.
  • the third indication message may be only measurement configuration information, that is, measurement objects or cells or frequency points that need to be measured are reduced through implementation.
  • the sending of the third indication information by the network device to indicate that the periodic measurement is relaxed may be specifically indicated in the form of the network device sending a reference signal measurement configuration to the terminal device.
  • the network device may send two sets of SMTC (SS/PBCH block measurement timing configuration, SSB measurement timing configuration) configurations to the terminal device, that is, the first SMTC configuration and the second SMTC configuration.
  • the first SMTC configuration may be used when the terminal device does not enter the measurement relaxed state
  • the second SMTC configuration may be used when the terminal device enters the measurement relaxed state.
  • the first SMTC configuration and the second SMTC configuration may be configured in the same message, or may be configured in different messages.
  • the message may be an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the SMTC configuration is used to instruct the terminal device to measure the timing of the SSB signal
  • the SMTC configuration includes a measurement period and an offset.
  • the offset information is used to indicate the starting position of the SMTC in the measurement period, for example, from which time slot, subframe, or symbol the SMTC measurement period starts.
  • the measurement period indicated by the second SMTC configuration may be longer than the measurement period indicated by the first SMTC configuration, so that the terminal device can save power consumption when measuring the relaxed state.
  • an SMTC ID may be carried in the SMTC configuration, which is used to indicate that the SMTC configuration is the first SMTC configuration or the second SMTC configuration.
  • the second SMTC configuration may be indicated by a dedicated field. If this field exists, the terminal device is configured with configuration information that meets the first criterion for relaxed use of measurement. This field may be included in the measurement object configuration of the measurement configuration.
  • the second SMTC configuration can be configured synchronously with the configuration message of the first criterion when the terminal device does not meet the first criterion; the second SMTC configuration can be configured again when the terminal device meets the first criterion.
  • the network device may send indication information to the terminal device, where the indication information instructs the terminal device to use the second SMTC configuration for measurement.
  • the instruction information may be equivalent to the above third instruction information, that is, the network device sends to the terminal device to use the second SMTC configuration for measurement to implicitly instruct the terminal device to enter the measurement relaxation state and use the second SMTC configuration for measurement. If the terminal device has not been configured with the second SMTC configuration before, the second SMTC configuration may be included in the indication information. If yes, after receiving the indication information, the terminal device uses the second SMTC configuration to perform relaxed measurement.
  • the change of the measurement content may be reflected in the form of a change in the SMTC configuration, that is, the network device configures a different SMTC configuration for the terminal device after the terminal device enters the measurement relaxation state.
  • the network device may only configure the first SMTC configuration for the terminal device.
  • the network device may send an indication message indicating that the measurement period in the first SMTC configuration of the terminal device is changed, for example , the network device can instruct the terminal device to set the measurement period in the first SMTC configuration to be x times the original, or, by default in the protocol, when the terminal device is in the measurement relaxation state, the used period is x times the measurement period when it is not in the measurement relaxation state , when the terminal device enters the measurement relaxation state or receives the third indication information, it uses the cycle corresponding to the measurement relaxation state to perform measurement.
  • x may be equal to 2. It should be noted that the object of measurement relaxation may be for the serving cell or for the neighboring cell.
  • the network device may also configure similar configuration information for the CSI-RS signal.
  • the network device sends CSI-RS configuration information for configuring CSI-RS resources to the terminal device.
  • the CSI-RS configuration information includes information such as cell identification and frequency domain configuration, and at least one CSI-RS resource configuration gather.
  • the resource configuration of each CSI-RS in the CSI-RS resource configuration set includes configurations such as CSI-RS index, period, and offset.
  • the CSI-RS resource configuration set may include a first CSI-RS configuration and a second CSI-RS configuration, wherein the first CSI-RS configuration is used when the terminal device is not in the measurement relaxation state , the second CSI-RS configuration is used by the terminal device when measuring the relaxed state.
  • the protocol predefines to configure the first CSI-RS configuration in the A field, and configure the second CSI-RS configuration in the B field.
  • the terminal device defaults that the configuration of the A field is the first CSI-RS configuration, and the configuration of the B field is the CSI-RS configuration.
  • the network device may configure the first CSI-RS configuration and the second CSI-RS configuration at the same time when the terminal device does not enter the measurement relaxation state, or the network device may first configure the first CSI-RS configuration when the terminal device does not enter the measurement relaxation state , and then configure the second CSI-RS when the terminal device enters the measurement relaxed state, or the network device can first configure the first CSI-RS configuration when the terminal device does not enter the measurement relaxed state, and indicate that the terminal device enters the measurement relaxed state.
  • X 2.
  • the terminal device ends the measurement relaxation state.
  • the terminal device when it finds that the relationship between the measurement amount and the first threshold does not satisfy the first criterion when measuring the relaxed state, it may send fourth indication information to the network device.
  • the fourth indication information may indicate the measurement amount and The relationship of the first threshold does not satisfy the first criterion, and the measurement amount may be the measurement amount corresponding to the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information, or may be the measurement amount of the reference signal type randomly measured by the terminal device itself. Applications are not limited to this.
  • the terminal device may decide to end the measurement relaxation state by sending the fourth indication information, that is, the measurement relaxation may be terminated when it is determined that the first criterion is not satisfied. It can be before or after sending the fourth message. It is also possible to wait for fifth indication information from the network device, where the fifth indication information is used to instruct the terminal equipment to end the measurement relaxation state.
  • the terminal may also notify the terminal of the measurement relaxation method adopted by the terminal.
  • the third indication information sent by the network device may include a timer configuration, and the timer configuration may also be the default configuration of the terminal.
  • the terminal device After receiving the third indication information, the terminal device enters the measurement relaxation state The timer is started at the same time, and when the timer reaches the first duration, the terminal device ends the measurement relaxation state. It should be noted that if the terminal device finds that the relationship between the measurement amount and the first threshold does not meet the first criterion within the first time period, it can send the fourth indication information to the network device, and decide to end the measurement relaxation state or wait for the network device's response.
  • the fifth indication message ends measuring the relaxed state.
  • the third indication information sent by the network device may include a timer configuration, and the timer configuration may also be a default configuration of the terminal.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the third indication information, it enters the measurement relaxation state and starts the timer at the same time. Before the timer reaches the first duration, the terminal device finds that the relationship between the measurement quantity and the first threshold does not satisfy the first criterion, and does not Send the fourth instruction information to the network device, and when the timer reaches the first duration, the terminal device sends the fourth instruction information to the network device, decides to end the measurement relaxation state by itself or waits for the fifth instruction information from the network device to end the measurement relaxation state.
  • the network device receives the fourth indication information, or when the network device judges the load balance, or, according to the measurement result reported by the terminal device, determines that the terminal device is not When it is necessary to perform measurement relaxation, fifth indication information may be sent to the terminal device to instruct the terminal device to end the measurement relaxation state.
  • the fifth indication information may be a dedicated RRC message, or may be a MAC CE message or the like.
  • the terminal device may judge whether to end the measurement relaxation state according to the first condition.
  • the first condition reference may be made to method 200, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device may switch from the second SMTC configuration to the first SMTC configuration at a time point at its own choice when it judges that the first criterion is not met. Configured for measurements, no indication of network devices is required.
  • the terminal device judges that the first criterion is not satisfied, it may send the fourth indication information to the network device, and after receiving the fifth indication information from the network device, the terminal device, according to the fifth indication information from the network device, that is, After the network device instructs the terminal device to end the measurement relaxation state, the terminal device defaults to switch from the second SMTC configuration to the first SMTC configuration for measurement.
  • the terminal device when it judges that the first criterion is not satisfied, it may send the above-mentioned fourth indication information to the network device, and after receiving the sixth indication information from the network device, the terminal device switches from the second SMTC configuration to the first SMTC Configuration for measurement, specifically, the sixth indication information instructs the terminal device to switch from the second SMTC configuration to the first SMTC configuration for measurement.
  • the sixth indication information carries the SMTC configuration for stopping relaxation measurement.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of this application can indicate the type of the first reference signal of the terminal device when the terminal device enters the connected state, so that the terminal device can measure the reference signal of the first reference signal type based on the indication, and obtain the first measurement Value, and judge whether the relationship between the first measurement value and the first threshold meets the first criterion, the terminal device reports the judgment result to the network device, and the network device indicates whether the terminal device enters the measurement relaxation state according to the result, when entering the measurement relaxation state , which can save the power consumption of the terminal equipment in the connected state. And, when the first criterion is not satisfied, the measurement relaxation is stopped in time to ensure that the terminal works normally in the connected state.
  • Fig. 4 is another example of the communication method of the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4, the method 400 includes:
  • the network device sends measurement configuration information to the terminal device.
  • each measurement object corresponds to a measurement identifier
  • each reporting configuration corresponds to a measurement reporting identifier
  • each measurement identifier is associated with a measurement object identifier and a measurement reporting identifier.
  • the terminal device can determine the corresponding measurement object and report configuration according to the received measurement identifier.
  • At least one item of frequency information, cell information, reference signal information, etc. is configured in each measurement object in the measurement object list.
  • a new event is defined in the reporting configuration list, and the content indicated by the event may be similar to the content indicated by the first indication information in method 300.
  • the event may be: the first criterion judgment event, Specifically, it includes: an event judged by a stationary criterion, an event judged not at the edge of a cell, and the like.
  • This configuration can be defined as reporting when entering the first criterion event, or reporting when leaving the first criterion event, or can be defined as reporting both entering and leaving the first criterion event. It may be defined that the stationary criterion event corresponds to the first event, and the not-at-the-cell-edge criterion event may be defined as the second event.
  • the network device instructs the terminal device to trigger the report based on the event, or to report periodically, that is, for example, when the configuration triggers the report based on the event, the terminal device enters the first event or the second event, then the network device report, or, if the terminal device leaves the first event or the second event, report to the network device, or report both the terminal device entering or leaving the first event or the second event.
  • periodic reporting is configured, for example, the terminal device periodically reports the entering first event or leaving the first event to the network device, or the terminal device periodically reports entering the second event or leaving the second event to the network device.
  • the report configuration includes the first event or the second event that triggers the report, and the threshold of the corresponding event, indicating whether the departure time triggers the report, the delay amount, the trigger time, whether to use the white list cell, the reference signal type, and whether to report the service At least one of the cell quality, whether to report the quality of neighboring cells, and the maximum number of reported measurement reports.
  • the stationary criterion may be defined as an event, and in the event, an entry criterion and an exit criterion are defined, the entry criterion may be that the stationary criterion is met, and the exit criterion may be that the stationary criterion is not satisfied.
  • the network device may add indication information in the reporting configuration sent to the terminal device, and the indication information instructs the terminal device to report when the leaving criterion is satisfied.
  • another indication information may also be added, and the indication information instructs the terminal device to report when the entry criterion is satisfied.
  • the stationary criterion may be defined as two events, wherein entering the stationary criterion is one event and leaving the stationary criterion is the other event.
  • reporting is performed when the terminal device satisfies the entry-quiet criterion.
  • reporting is also performed when the terminal device satisfies the leaving-quiet criterion.
  • the terminal device judges that it satisfies the following formula and then reports:
  • the first reference signal type is SSB, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to SSB:
  • S SearchDeltaP is the first threshold value corresponding to the SSB signal
  • Srxlev is the reference signal receiving power (Reference Signal Receiving Power, RSRP) quality of the current serving cell, that is, the first measured value
  • RSRP Reference Signal Receiving Power
  • the terminal device judges the first measured value of the SSB signal and the first threshold.
  • the relationship of the thresholds satisfies the quiescence criterion, ie, the entry into the first event.
  • the first time of the preset time may be the maintenance time configured by the base station to the terminal device to meet the static criterion, and the specific name of the first time may be TSearchDeltaP or Tin.
  • the specific name of a time is not limited.
  • the base station can also configure the terminal device with a second time for the maintenance time that does not meet the static criterion, which is used for the terminal device to judge whether to leave the measurement relaxation state.
  • the specific name of the second time can be Tout.
  • the specific name of the second time is not limited.
  • the first time of the maintenance time satisfying the static criterion and the second maintenance time of not satisfying the static criterion may be configured through an RRC message, or may be configured through a report configuration in the measurement configuration.
  • the terminal device sets Srxlev of the camping cell or serving cell as Srxlev Ref .
  • the terminal device will camp on the Srxlev of the cell or the serving cell.
  • the third time is indicated by the base station to the terminal device.
  • the third time is defaulted by the terminal device. .
  • the first reference signal type is CSI-RS, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to CSI-RS:
  • S SearchDeltaPCSI is the first threshold indicated by the first indication information received in the connected state
  • SSearchDeltaP is the threshold received in the idle state or inactive state
  • the threshold is the threshold of the SSB signal
  • offsetCSI is the offset received in the connected state.
  • the terminal device judges that it satisfies the following formula and reports it:
  • S SearchDeltaP is the first threshold value corresponding to the SSB signal
  • Srxlev is the reference signal receiving power (Reference Signal Receiving Power, RSRP) quality of the current serving cell, that is, the first measured value
  • RSRP Reference Signal Receiving Power
  • the first reference signal type is CSI-RS, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to CSI-RS:
  • S SearchDeltaPCSI is the first threshold indicated by the first indication information received in the connected state
  • S SearchDeltaP is the threshold received in the idle state or inactive state
  • the threshold is the threshold of the SSB signal
  • the offset CSI is the offset received in the connected state.
  • the terminal device judges that it satisfies the following formula and reports it:
  • the first reference signal type is SSB, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to SSB:
  • S searchThresholdQ is the first threshold
  • S SearchThresholdQ is also the first threshold
  • Srxlev is the RSRP quality of the current serving cell
  • Squal is the current serving cell
  • the reference RSRQ quality of the zone is the reference RSRQ quality of the zone.
  • the first reference signal type is CSI-RS, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to CSI-RS:
  • S SearchThresholdP and S SearchThresholdQ are the thresholds received when idle state or inactive state
  • the threshold is the threshold value of SSB signal
  • offset CSI is the offset amount received when connected state
  • S SearchDeltaPCSI is the first thresholds indicated by the first indication information received in the connected state.
  • the terminal device judges that it satisfies the following formula and reports:
  • the first reference signal type is SSB, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to SSB:
  • S searchThresholdP is the first threshold
  • S SearchThresholdQ is also the first threshold
  • Srxlev is the RSRP quality of the current serving cell
  • Squal is the current serving cell
  • the reference RSRQ quality of the zone is the reference RSRQ quality of the zone.
  • the first reference signal type is CSI-RS, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to CSI-RS:
  • S SearchThresholdP and S SearchThresholdQ are the thresholds received when idle state or inactive state
  • the threshold is the threshold value of SSB signal
  • offset CSI is the offset amount received when connected state
  • S SearchDeltaPCSI is the first thresholds indicated by the first indication information received in the connected state.
  • the configuration of the first reference information type may be included, which is used to indicate which reference signal is used.
  • the first reference signal type includes: SSB, CSI-RS, and the first reference information type
  • SSB SSB
  • CSI-RS CSI-RS
  • the first reference information type For the description of the signal type, refer to the method 300 for details. It can also be default, and the type of the first reference signal is defaulted from the event definition of the configuration information.
  • the terminal device may indicate the capability information of the terminal device to the network device after the network device establishes the RRC connection, and the capability information may include narrowband terminal capability, and/or , the ability to support connection state measurement relaxation, etc., which are not particularly limited in this application.
  • the terminal device performs measurement according to the measurement configuration information.
  • the terminal device measures the reference signal of the neighboring cell or the serving cell according to the first reference signal type in the measurement configuration information.
  • the terminal device performs measurement reporting.
  • the terminal device judges whether the trigger condition of the event is met according to the measurement result.
  • the trigger condition can be entering or leaving the first event, or entering or leaving the second event, and sends a measurement report message to the network device according to the configuration in the report configuration, It is used to indicate that the terminal device satisfies the entering or leaving the first event or the second event.
  • the terminal device sends the measurement result to the network device, and the result includes the quality of the serving cell and/or the quality of the neighboring cell, wherein the quality of the serving cell may be at least one measurement result, and the quality of the neighboring cell may be the measurement result of at least one neighboring cell.
  • the stationary criterion is regarded as an event, and within the event, an entry criterion and an exit criterion are defined.
  • the terminal device After receiving the configuration information, the terminal device triggers reporting of the measurement report if the terminal device meets the entry criterion or exit criterion. It should be noted that when the measurement report is sent, it also needs to carry an indication information, which is used to indicate the entry criterion or the exit criterion, that is, the reason for the report needs to be indicated.
  • the measurement report message sent by the terminal to the network device carries an indication information, which is used to indicate that the measurement report has no other measurement results, such as the measurement results of the same-frequency adjacent cells, different-frequency adjacent cells, or no Measurement results for any cell.
  • the network device sends third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to enter the measurement relaxation state.
  • the network device judges that the terminal device satisfies entering the first or second event according to the measurement report message sent by the terminal device, it sends a third indication message to the terminal, and the indication information may be included in the resent measurement configuration information
  • the embodiment may include frequency information or cell list information to be measured in the measurement configuration information, and the above information has fewer frequencies and cells to be measured than the measurement configuration information previously received by the terminal device , so that the terminal device can measure fewer frequencies, or a smaller number of cells, etc., which is equivalent to entering a measurement relaxation state.
  • the embodiment may be in the measurement configuration information, which specifically instructs the terminal device to relax the measurement.
  • the third indication information may be carried in an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the specific third indication information may indicate the way of measuring relaxation, such as the period of measurement, or an indication of no measurement.
  • the network device may also directly send an instruction to start or stop measurement relaxation to the terminal device without relying on the above process.
  • the indication information may also be sent as a separate message, indicating the specific content of the measurement relaxation to the terminal device.
  • the indication information may also be sent as a separate message, indicating the specific content of the measurement relaxation to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device ends the measurement relaxation state.
  • the terminal device may report the first leaving event or the second leaving event to the network device, or send indication information to the network device separately, Indicates leaving the first event or the second event.
  • the terminal device may decide to stop relaxing and send a measurement report message to the network device to notify the network device that the terminal device leaves the first or second event.
  • the measurement relaxation may be stopped.
  • the stop measurement relaxation instruction sent by the network device can be included in the RRC reconfiguration, or in the MAC CE.
  • An instruction to stop measurement relaxation may be performed for a certain cell or frequency or a certain measurement object or a certain measurement identifier.
  • the terminal device may also judge whether to leave the measurement relaxation state according to whether the first condition is satisfied.
  • the first condition reference may be made to the method 200, which will not be repeated here.
  • step S360 For other related descriptions of this step, refer to the related description of step S360 in the method 300 .
  • a new measurement reporting event can be added to the measurement configuration information to indicate the type of the first reference signal of the terminal device, so that the terminal device can perform the first reference signal based on the indication.
  • the reference signal of the signal type is measured to obtain the first measurement value, and judge whether the relationship between the first measurement value and the first threshold meets the first criterion, the terminal device reports the judgment result to the network device through the measurement report information, and the network device according to the The result indicates whether the terminal device enters the measurement relaxation state, and when entering the measurement relaxation state, the power consumption of the terminal device in the connected state can be saved. Report through the measurement reporting process to realize the connection state measurement relaxation process.
  • Fig. 5 is another example of the communication method of the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 5, the method 500 includes:
  • the centralized unit (Centralized Unit, CU) sends first information to the distributed unit (Distributed Unit, DU), where the first information is used to indicate that the terminal device is prohibited from accessing the first cell.
  • the distributed unit Distributed Unit, DU
  • Terminal devices can have two types of terminals with different capabilities, including: one receiving branch (1R) terminal device, two receiving branch (2R) receiving devices, for low-capability 1R or 2R terminal devices, more wireless resources need to be consumed, Therefore, the network side will perform access control on low-capability terminals when the load is heavy, and limit the application of this type of terminal equipment.
  • the CU-DU architecture when the CU determines to perform access control on the terminal device, the CU sends the first information to the DU, and the first information indicates that the 1R or 2R terminal device is prohibited from accessing the first cell. Specifically, the first information is used to instruct the terminal device to select the first cell when performing cell selection or cell reselection.
  • the DU sends a system message to the terminal device, where the system message includes the first information.
  • the DU receives the first message sent by the CU.
  • the DU may directly include the content of the first message in a system message and send it to the terminal device.
  • the DU may receive the first message and re- Generate an instruction message to include in the system message and send it to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives first information, and determines that access to the first cell is prohibited according to the first information.
  • the terminal device receives the first message in the system message, and the terminal device determines that the first cell cannot be accessed according to its own 1R or 2R capability, and further, the terminal device executes the same-frequency or different-frequency cell re-registration according to the first information. select.
  • Fig. 6 is a schematic diagram of a communication device 600 according to an embodiment of the present application, and each unit in the communication device 600 may be implemented by software.
  • the communication device 600 may be the terminal device in the method embodiment 200 above, or a chip configured to realize the functions of the terminal device in the method embodiment above. It should be understood that the communication apparatus 600 may correspond to the steps corresponding to the terminal device in the method 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 600 includes:
  • the transceiving unit 610 is configured to receive the first indication information sent by the network device.
  • the processing unit 620 is configured to measure the reference signal of the first reference signal type according to the first indication information in the connected state, so as to obtain a first measurement value.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the first reference signal type. Further, the first indication information is used to instruct the processing unit 620 to perform a first determination on the reference signal of the first reference signal type, and the first determination is used to determine the difference between the measured value of the reference signal of the first reference signal type and the first threshold Whether the relationship between satisfies the first criterion.
  • the first indication information is also used to indicate the first threshold, or offset information. It should be noted that if the first indication information is used to indicate the offset information, it is possible that the transceiver unit 610 has received the threshold information once in the idle state or the inactive state, and the processing unit 620 combines the offset information on the basis of the threshold information. The amount information is used for subsequent judgments.
  • the first threshold may be the first threshold reconfigured when the communication device enters the connected state.
  • the first threshold may be the threshold when the communication device is in the idle state, and the processing unit 620 uses the idle state by default. The time threshold continues to be used for judgment.
  • the first reference signal type may include a synchronization signal block (Synchronization Signal Block, SSB), and a channel state information reference signal (Channel State Information-Reference Signal, CSI-RS).
  • SSB Synchronization Signal Block
  • CSI-RS Channel State Information-Reference Signal
  • the processing unit 620 measures the SSB signal, and in the connected state, the processing unit 620 can measure the SSB signal, and the processing unit 620 can also measure the CSI-RS signal .
  • the first indication information when the communication device is in the connected state, the first indication information may be sent separately through broadcast or dedicated signaling, and the dedicated signaling may be a radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) reconfiguration message, or media access control (Medium Access Control, MAC) control element (Control Element, CE) MAC CE and other messages, which are not particularly limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • MAC Media Access Control
  • CE Control Element
  • the first indication information when the communication device is in the connected state, the first indication information may be included in the measurement configuration information or the reporting configuration, and the content indicated by the first indication information may be reported based on event triggering or periodic reporting. Events are defined in the escalation list.
  • the first indication information may also be carried in an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information may be an implicit indication, for example, when the communication device is in the connected state, all the measurement configuration information received by the transceiver unit 610 is an indication When the processing unit 620 uses the SSB signal for measurement or reporting, the transceiver unit 610 does not receive the first indication information but uses the SSB signal to perform the measurement for the first determination by default, or, when the communication device is in the connected state, the transceiver unit 610 When all the received measurement configuration information indicates that the processing unit 620 uses the CSI-RS signal for measurement or reporting, the transceiver unit 610 does not receive the first indication information but the processing unit 620 uses the CSI-RS signal for the first measurement by default. Judgmental measurement.
  • the SSB signal is used by default to perform the measurement for the first determination, and the network device does not need to send the first indication information to indicate the type of the first reference signal. It should be noted that, if the first indication information is received, the default SSB signal is not used to perform the measurement of the first determination. Correspondingly, the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information is used for the first determination. A judgmental measurement. For another example, when the communication device is in an idle state or an inactive state, the network device broadcasts first indication information to the transceiver unit 610. Optionally, the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information is an SSB signal.
  • the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information is a CSI-RS signal.
  • the measurement may be continued according to the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information received in the idle state.
  • the first criterion may include a stationary criterion and a not-at-the-cell-edge criterion. It should be noted that the stationary criterion and the not-at-the-cell-edge criterion can evaluate the approximate location and mobility information of the communication device to a certain extent.
  • the relationship between the first measured value and the first threshold (or the offset of the first threshold) satisfies the static criterion, then the relationship between the first measured value of the reference signal of the first reference signal type and the first threshold satisfies the following relation:
  • For the first reference signal type is SSB signal:
  • S SearchDeltaP is the first threshold value corresponding to the SSB signal
  • Srxlev is the reference signal receiving power (Reference Signal Receiving Power, RSRP) quality of the current serving cell, that is, the first measured value
  • RSRP Reference Signal Receiving Power
  • For the first reference signal type is a CSI-RS signal:
  • S SearchDeltaPCSI is the first threshold indicated by the first indication information received in the connected state
  • S SearchDeltaP is the threshold received when the idle state or the inactive state
  • the threshold is the threshold of the SSB signal
  • the offset CSI is the offset received in the connected state.
  • the name of the threshold and the offset value in the embodiment of the present application is an example of a name, and other names may also be used, which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the relationship between the first measured value and the first threshold (or the offset of the first threshold) satisfies the not-at-the-cell-edge criterion, then the relationship between the first measured value and the first threshold satisfies the following relationship:
  • For the first reference signal type is SSB signal:
  • S searchThresholdQ is the first threshold
  • S SearchThresholdQ is also the first threshold
  • Srxlev is the RSRP quality of the current serving cell
  • Squal is the current serving cell
  • the reference RSRQ quality of the zone is the reference RSRQ quality of the zone.
  • For the first reference signal type is a CSI-RS signal:
  • S SearchThresholdP and S SearchThresholdQ are the thresholds received when idle state or inactive state
  • the threshold is the threshold value of SSB signal
  • offset CSI is the offset amount received when connected state
  • S SearchDeltaPCSI is the first thresholds indicated by the first indication information received in the connected state.
  • the communication device performs the first determination according to the threshold value of the broadcasted SSB signal in the idle state, and when the communication device enters the connection state from the idle state, the network device may instruct the processing unit 620 to measure
  • the type of the reference signal is SSB signal or CSI-RS signal.
  • the threshold value of the SSB signal in the idle state can be continued, or the first threshold value of the SSB signal can be re-indicated.
  • the offset amount may be indicated based on the threshold of the SSB signal in the idle state, or the first threshold of the CSI-RS signal may be re-indicated, which is not particularly limited in the present application.
  • the network device may also instruct the processing unit 620 whether the measurement meets other criteria, which is not limited in this application.
  • the other criterion may assist the network device in judging whether to make the communication device enter the measurement relaxation state.
  • the transceiving unit 610 receives the first indication information, determines the first reference signal type used for the first determination, and the processing unit 620 measures the reference signal of the first reference signal type.
  • the processing unit 620 may perform n measurements on the serving cell, the n measurements may be arranged according to the measurement time, and n is greater than or equal to 1.
  • the processing unit 620 may perform measurements on m neighboring cells of the serving cell, where m is greater than or equal to 1.
  • the transceiving unit 610 is further configured to send second indication information to the network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the relationship between the first measurement value and the first threshold satisfies the first criterion.
  • the second indication information is sent to the network device as a separate signaling, which may be sent to the network device through the auxiliary information message of the transceiver unit 610, or may be sent to the network device through MAC CE information.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate that the relationship between the first measurement value and the first threshold satisfies the first criterion.
  • the processing unit 620 may perform at least n measurements on the serving cell, and report the measurements that satisfy the first criterion As a result, the n measurements can be sorted according to the measurement time.
  • the processing unit 620 can also perform measurements on m neighboring cells, and report the measurement results satisfying the first criterion.
  • the second indication information is sent to the network device in the measurement report of the processing unit 620 .
  • the processing unit 620 may perform at least n measurements on the serving cell, and report the measurement results satisfying the first criterion. The n measurements may be sorted according to the time of measurement.
  • the processing unit 620 may also The m neighboring cells may be measured, and the measurement results satisfying the first criterion are reported.
  • the transceiver unit 610 may also report the measurement results that do not satisfy the first criterion.
  • the transceiving unit 610 is further configured to receive third indication information sent by the network device, and the third indication information is used to instruct the processing unit 620 to enter the measurement relaxation state.
  • the communication device 600 may be the network device in the method embodiment 200 above, or a chip for realizing the functions of the network device in the method embodiment above. It should be understood that the communication apparatus 600 may correspond to the steps corresponding to the network device in the method 200 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 600 includes:
  • the transceiving unit 610 is configured to send the first indication information to the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 620 is configured to determine that the terminal device can enter the measurement relaxation state.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the first reference signal type. Further, the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to perform a first determination on the reference signal of the first reference signal type, and the first determination is used to determine the difference between the measured value of the reference signal of the first reference signal type and the first threshold Whether the relationship satisfies the first criterion.
  • the first indication information is also used to indicate the first threshold, or offset information. It should be noted that if the first indication information is used to indicate offset information, it is possible that the terminal device has received the threshold information once in the idle state or inactive state, and the terminal device combines the offset information based on the threshold information The information is used for subsequent judgments.
  • the first threshold may be the first threshold reconfigured when the terminal device enters the connected state.
  • the first threshold may be the threshold when the terminal device is in the idle state, and the terminal device uses the idle state by default. The threshold value continues to be used for judgment.
  • the first reference signal type may include a synchronization signal block (Synchronization Signal Block, SSB), and a channel state information reference signal (Channel State Information-Reference Signal, CSI-RS).
  • SSB Synchronization Signal Block
  • CSI-RS Channel State Information-Reference Signal
  • the terminal device measures the SSB signal, and in the connected state, the terminal device can measure the SSB signal, and the terminal device can also measure the CSI-RS signal.
  • the first indication information when the terminal device is in the connected state, the first indication information may be sent separately through broadcast or dedicated signaling, and the dedicated signaling may be a radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) reconfiguration message, or media access control (Medium Access Control, MAC) control element (Control Element, CE) MAC CE and other messages, which are not particularly limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • MAC Media Access Control
  • CE Control Element
  • the first indication information when the terminal device is in the connected state, the first indication information may be included in the measurement configuration information or the reporting configuration, and the content indicated by the first indication information may be reported based on event triggering or periodic reporting. Events are defined in the escalation list.
  • the first indication information may also be carried in an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information may be an implicit indication, for example, when the terminal device is in the connected state, all the measurement configuration information received by the terminal device indicates that the terminal When the device uses the SSB signal for measurement or reporting, the terminal device does not receive the first indication information but uses the SSB signal to perform the measurement for the first determination by default, or, when the terminal device is in the connected state, the measurement received by the terminal device All of the configuration information indicates that when the terminal device uses the CSI-RS signal to perform measurement or report, the terminal device does not receive the first indication information but uses the CSI-RS signal to perform measurement for the first determination by default. It should be noted that other measurement requirements are configured in the measurement configuration information.
  • the SSB signal is used by default to perform the measurement for the first determination, and the network device does not need to send the first indication information to indicate the type of the first reference signal.
  • the first indication information is received, the default SSB signal is not used to perform the measurement of the first determination.
  • the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information is used for the first determination.
  • the network device broadcasts first indication information to the terminal device.
  • the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information is an SSB signal.
  • the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information is a CSI-RS signal.
  • the measurement may be continued according to the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information received in the idle state.
  • the first criterion may include a stationary criterion and a not-at-the-cell-edge criterion. It should be noted that the stationary criterion and the not-at-the-cell-edge criterion can evaluate the approximate location and mobility information of the terminal device to a certain extent.
  • the relationship between the first measured value and the first threshold (or the offset of the first threshold) satisfies the static criterion, then the relationship between the first measured value of the reference signal of the first reference signal type and the first threshold satisfies the following relation:
  • For the first reference signal type is SSB signal:
  • S SearchDeltaP is the first threshold value corresponding to the SSB signal
  • Srxlev is the reference signal receiving power (Reference Signal Receiving Power, RSRP) quality of the current serving cell, that is, the first measured value
  • RSRP Reference Signal Receiving Power
  • For the first reference signal type is a CSI-RS signal:
  • S SearchDeltaPCSI is the first threshold indicated by the first indication information received in the connected state
  • S SearchDeltaP is the threshold received when the idle state or the inactive state
  • the threshold is the threshold of the SSB signal
  • the offset CSI is the offset received in the connected state.
  • the name of the threshold value and the offset value in the embodiment of the present application is only an example of a name, and other names may also be used, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the relationship between the first measured value and the first threshold (or the offset of the first threshold) satisfies the not-at-the-cell-edge criterion, then the relationship between the first measured value and the first threshold satisfies the following relationship:
  • For the first reference signal type is SSB signal:
  • S searchThresholdQ is the first threshold
  • S SearchThresholdQ is also the first threshold
  • Srxlev is the RSRP quality of the current serving cell
  • Squal is the current serving cell
  • the reference RSRQ quality of the zone is the reference RSRQ quality of the zone.
  • For the first reference signal type is a CSI-RS signal:
  • S SearchThresholdP and S SearchThresholdQ are the thresholds received when idle state or inactive state
  • the threshold is the threshold value of SSB signal
  • offset CSI is the offset amount received when connected state
  • S SearchDeltaPCSI is the first thresholds indicated by the first indication information received in the connected state.
  • the first judgment is made according to the threshold value of the broadcasted SSB signal.
  • the network device may indicate the terminal device to measure the reference The signal type is SSB signal or CSI-RS signal.
  • the threshold value of the SSB signal in the idle state can be extended, or the first threshold value of the SSB signal can be re-indicated.
  • the offset amount may be indicated based on the threshold of the SSB signal in the idle state, or the first threshold of the CSI-RS signal may be re-indicated, which is not particularly limited in the present application. It should be noted that, in some cases, the network device may also instruct the terminal device whether the measurement meets other criteria, which is not limited in this application. Optionally, the other criterion may assist the network device in judging whether to make the terminal device enter the measurement relaxed state.
  • the transceiving unit 610 is further configured to receive second indication information sent by the terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the relationship between the first measurement value and the first threshold satisfies the first criterion.
  • the second indication information is sent to the transceiver unit 610 as a separate signaling, which may be sent to the transceiver unit 610 through a terminal device auxiliary information message, or may be sent to the transceiver unit 610 through MAC CE information.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate that the relationship between the first measurement value and the first threshold satisfies the first criterion.
  • the terminal device may perform at least n measurements on the serving cell, and report the measurement results satisfying the first criterion. , the n measurements may be sorted according to the measurement time.
  • the terminal device may also perform measurements on m neighboring cells, and report the measurement results satisfying the first criterion.
  • the terminal device reports the measurement results of n serving cells, and the measurement results of the n serving cells may be n results satisfying the criterion, or, after satisfying the criterion, the reported n measuring results include not Measurement results that meet the criteria.
  • the terminal device when the first criterion is met, reports the measurement results of m neighboring cells. Reporting the result can enable the network device to obtain more information about the terminal device to determine whether to allow the terminal to perform measurement relaxation.
  • the second indication information is sent to the transceiver unit 610 in the measurement report of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may perform n measurements on the serving cell, and report the measurement results satisfying the first criterion.
  • the n measurements may be sorted according to the time of measurement.
  • the terminal device may also perform m neighboring cells, and report the measurement results satisfying the first criterion.
  • the terminal device may also report measurement results that do not satisfy the first criterion.
  • the terminal in the connected state may also use or multiplex it.
  • the base station when it sends a system message, it can send an indication message, which is used to indicate whether to use the criteria or parameters configured in the idle state to evaluate whether the static criterion is met after the terminal enters the connected state, and can perform a subsequent reporting process.
  • the base station sends indication information to the terminal in message 4 or RRC reconfiguration, indicating whether to use the static criterion in broadcast.
  • the transceiving unit 610 is further configured to send third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to enter the measurement relaxation state.
  • this step is optional. If the processing unit 620 determines that the terminal device cannot enter the measurement relaxed state according to the second indication information, the network device may not send the third indication information to the terminal device.
  • the transceiver unit 610 receives the second indication information.
  • the processing unit 620 evaluates the approximate location and mobility information of the terminal device according to the measurement results of the serving cell in the second indication information.
  • the processing unit 620 according to the measurement result of the neighboring cell in the second indication information, judge whether handover may occur in the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 620 determines that the terminal device can perform measurement relaxation according to the second indication information, it sends third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to enter the measurement relaxation state.
  • the third indication information may be an RRC message, for example, an RRC reconfiguration message, or may be a MAC CE message, etc.
  • the content of the measurement relaxation may be frequency measurement relaxation, cell measurement relaxation, period measurement relaxation, and the like.
  • the third indication information may include: the frequency that needs to be measured, or the frequency that needs to be measured to relax, or the cell that needs to be measured, or the cell that needs to be measured, or the cycle of the measurement (such as the cycle is seconds, minutes , time, etc.).
  • the processing unit 620 can instruct the terminal device to relax the measurement period.
  • the original measurement period is once every 5 minutes. After the state, the measurement cycle can be measured every 10 minutes. After the terminal device enters the measurement relaxation state, it can perform measurement relaxation on a certain frequency.
  • the terminal device may not perform measurement on this frequency. After the terminal device enters the measurement relaxation state, it may perform measurement relaxation on a certain cell. As an example but not a limitation, the terminal device may not perform measurement on the cell. It should be noted that the content for the terminal device to enter the measurement relaxation state may also be a combination of the above three types.
  • the network device may instruct the terminal device that for a certain cell A, the measurement period is once every 20 minutes, and for a certain cell A, the measurement period is once every 20 minutes.
  • the measurement period is once every 10 minutes
  • the content of the measurement relaxation can be specifically indicated by the third indication information of the processing unit 620, or the third indication information can indicate to enter the measurement relaxation state and the default measurement by the terminal device side Relaxing content.
  • the third indication information may be an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the terminal device uses the SSB signal to perform measurement or the CSI-RS signal to perform measurement, and after receiving the third indication information, measurement relaxation can be performed on related measurements corresponding to the two types of reference signals.
  • the terminal device uses the SSB signal to perform measurement, receives the third indication information, and performs measurement relaxation on related measurement corresponding to the SSB signal.
  • the terminal device uses the CSI-RS signal to perform measurement, receives the third indication information, and performs measurement relaxation on related measurement corresponding to the CSI-RS signal.
  • the third indication information may carry a measurement ID, a measurement object ID, etc., and is used to indicate that the measurement object corresponding to the ID is sent back. It is also possible to indicate which reference signal the measurement relaxation is performed on.
  • the communication device 600 may be the terminal device in the method embodiment 300 above, or a chip for realizing the functions of the terminal device in the method embodiment above. It should be understood that the communication apparatus 600 may correspond to the steps corresponding to the terminal device in the method 300 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 600 includes:
  • the transceiving unit 610 is configured to receive the first indication information sent by the network device.
  • the processing unit 620 is configured to measure the reference signal of the first reference signal type according to the first indication information in the connected state, and acquire a first measurement value.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the first reference signal type.
  • the first reference signal type may include a synchronization signal block (Synchronization Signal Block, SSB), and a channel state information reference signal (Channel State Information-Reference Signal, CSI-RS).
  • SSB Synchronization Signal Block
  • CSI-RS Channel State Information-Reference Signal
  • the processing unit 620 measures the SSB signal, and in the connected state, the processing unit 620 can measure the SSB signal, and the processing unit 620 can also measure the CSI-RS signal .
  • the first indication information may be used to indicate that the processing unit 620 needs to perform a first determination on the reference signal of the first reference signal type, and the first determination is that the processing unit 620 needs to determine the measurement of the reference signal of the first reference signal type Whether the relationship between the value and the first threshold satisfies the first criterion.
  • the network device when the communication device is in the connected state, the network device sends the first indication information to the transceiver unit 610, and the first indication information may be sent by a broadcast message or by a dedicated signaling, for example , a Radio Resource Control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) reconfiguration message, or a Media Access Control (Medium Access Control, MAC) control element (Control Element, CE) MAC CE, etc., which are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first instruction information is used to instruct the processing unit 620 to measure the SSB signal, or to measure the CSI-RS signal, or to measure other possible types of reference signals. It should be noted that the measurement is used for the first determination.
  • all the measurement configuration information received by the transceiver unit 610 indicates that when the processing unit 620 uses SSB signals for measurement or reporting, the transceiver unit 610 does not receive the first Indicate information but the processing unit 620 uses the SSB signal to perform the measurement for the first determination by default, or, when the communication device is in the connected state, all the measurement configuration information received by the transceiver unit 610 indicates that the processing unit 620 uses CSI-RS When the signal is measured or reported, the transceiver unit 610 does not receive the first indication information but the processing unit 620 uses the CSI-RS signal to perform the measurement for the first determination by default. It should be noted that other measurement requirements are configured in the measurement configuration information.
  • the SSB signal when the communication device is in the connected state, the SSB signal is used by default to perform the measurement for the first determination, and the network device does not need to send the first indication information to indicate the first reference signal type.
  • the network device when the communication device is in the idle state or the inactive state, broadcasts first indication information to the transceiver unit 610.
  • the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information is an SSB signal
  • the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information is a CSI-RS signal.
  • the measurement may be continued according to the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information received in the idle state.
  • the communication device side protocol is adaptively modified, so that the transceiver unit 610 performs the measurement and determination of the first determination after receiving the first indication information, without special measurement configuration information to configure.
  • the first indication information may also be used to indicate the first threshold or offset information. It should be noted that if the first indication information is used to indicate the offset information, the communication device may be in an idle state or In the inactive state, the threshold information has been received once, and the terminal device combines the offset information with the threshold information for subsequent judgment.
  • the first threshold may be a first threshold reconfigured when the communication device enters a connected state, and optionally, the first threshold may be a threshold when the communication device is in an idle state.
  • the network device when the communication device is in the connected state, the network device sends first indication information to the transceiver unit 610, where the first indication information indicates the first threshold, or the first indication information indicates the first threshold
  • the offset amount, the first threshold value, or the first offset amount is the first threshold value or offset amount related to the SSB signal
  • the processing unit 620 performs the measurement for the first determination on the SSB signal by default, if the first If a threshold, or the offset of the first threshold is the first threshold or offset related to CSI-RS, then the processing unit 620 performs the measurement for the first determination on the CSI-RS signal by default.
  • the processing unit 620 is further configured to measure the reference signal of the first reference signal type according to the first indication information in the connected state, and acquire a first measurement value.
  • the transceiving unit 610 receives the first indication information, determines the first reference signal type used for the first determination, and the processing unit 620 measures the reference signal of the first reference signal type.
  • the processing unit 620 may perform at least n measurements on the serving cell, where n is greater than or equal to 1.
  • the processing unit 620 may perform measurements on at least m neighboring cells of the serving cell, where m is greater than or equal to 1.
  • the processing unit 620 determines the result of the first determination according to the first measured value and the first threshold.
  • the processing unit 620 measures a reference signal of the first reference signal type to obtain a first measurement value, and the processing unit 620 determines whether the relationship between the first measurement value and the first threshold satisfies a first criterion, and the first criterion may be Including stationary criterion, not at cell edge criterion. It should be noted that the stationary criterion and the not-at-the-cell-edge criterion can evaluate the approximate location and mobility information of the communication device to a certain extent.
  • the transceiving unit 610 is further configured to send second indication information to the network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the result of the first determination.
  • the terminal device determines that the relationship between the first measurement amount and the first threshold satisfies the first criterion, and the transceiver unit 610 sends second indication information to the network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first measurement amount and the first threshold A threshold relationship satisfies the first criterion.
  • the processing unit 620 may perform n measurements on the serving cell, and report the measurement results satisfying the first criterion. The n measurements may be sorted according to the time of measurement, and may be Optionally, the terminal device may also perform measurements on m neighboring cells, and report the measurement results satisfying the first criterion.
  • the terminal device determines that the relationship between the first measurement amount and the first threshold does not satisfy the first criterion, and the terminal device sends second indication information to the network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first measurement amount and the first threshold The relation of a threshold value does not meet the first criterion.
  • the processing unit 620 may perform n measurements on the serving cell and report the measurement results that do not satisfy the first criterion. The n measurements may be sorted according to the measurement time , optionally, the processing unit 620 may also measure m neighboring cells, and report the measurement results that do not satisfy the first criterion, where m and n are positive integers.
  • the processing unit 620 determines whether the relationship between the first measurement amount and the first threshold satisfies the first criterion, and the transceiver unit 610 sends second indication information to the network device, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first measurement amount Whether the relationship with the first threshold satisfies the first criterion.
  • the processing unit 620 may perform n measurements on the serving cell and report the n measurements.
  • the processing unit 620 may also perform n measurements on multiple The cell performs measurement and reports whether the measurement results of the m neighbor cells with the best quality of the cell satisfy the first criterion, where m and n are positive integers.
  • the second indication information may be sent to the network device through a communication device auxiliary information message, or may be sent to the network device through MAC CE information.
  • the transceiver unit 610 may wait for the first time and then send the second instruction information again.
  • the time may be sent by the network device to the transceiver unit 610 before, or may be defaulted or preconfigured by the transceiver unit 610 or specified by a protocol.
  • the transceiving unit 610 may also stop sending the second indication information to the network equipment after it still has not received the third indication information from the network equipment after reporting L times.
  • the transmission unit 610 can also be the default one of the transceiver unit 610. After the transceiver unit 610 stops sending the second indication information, if the first indication information is received again, the processing unit 620 will perform measurement again and send the second indication information according to the judgment result. .
  • the network device may configure the processing unit 620 with the maximum number of reports L after the first criterion is satisfied, and when the processing unit 620 finds that the first criterion is met, it starts sending the second indication to the network device
  • the sending period of the information is configured by the network device or the default configuration of the processing unit 620 .
  • the thin unit 610 stops sending the second indication information, and starts to measure the relaxation.
  • the L measurement results reported by the transceiver unit 610 may all satisfy the first criterion, or may not satisfy the first criterion.
  • the processing unit 620 may start a timer, and when the timer expires, judge again whether the first indication information is satisfied. If the criterion is satisfied, the second indication information is sent again, and if not satisfied, it does not need to be sent.
  • the timer may be previously sent by the network device to the transceiver unit 610, or may be specified by a protocol.
  • the transceiving unit 610 is further configured to receive third indication information sent by the network device, where the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to enter the measurement relaxation state.
  • the content of the measurement relaxation may be frequency measurement relaxation, cell measurement relaxation, period measurement relaxation, and the like.
  • the measurement period can be relaxed, and the network device can instruct the processing unit 620 to relax the measurement period.
  • the original measurement period is once every 5 minutes.
  • the measurement cycle can be measured once every 10 minutes.
  • the processing unit 620 may perform measurement relaxation on a certain frequency.
  • the processing unit 620 may not perform measurement on the frequency.
  • the processing unit 620 After the processing unit 620 enters the measurement relaxation state, it may perform measurement relaxation on a certain cell.
  • the processing unit 620 may not perform measurement on the cell. It should be noted that the content of the processing unit 620 entering the measurement relaxation state may also be a combination of the above three types. As an example and not a limitation, the network device may instruct the processing unit 620 to measure a certain cell A every 20 minutes. For a certain cell B, the measurement period is once every 10 minutes.
  • the content of the measurement relaxation can be specifically indicated by the third indication information of the network device, or can be indicated by the third indication information to enter the measurement relaxation state and be defaulted by the processing unit 620 Measure relaxation content.
  • the processing unit 620 uses the SSB signal to perform measurement or the CSI-RS signal to perform measurement, and upon receiving the third indication information, measurement relaxation can be performed on related measurements corresponding to the two types of reference signals.
  • the processing unit 620 uses the SSB signal to perform measurement, and performs measurement relaxation on the related measurement corresponding to the SSB signal after receiving the third indication information.
  • the processing unit 620 uses the CSI-RS signal to perform measurement, and performs measurement relaxation on the related measurement corresponding to the CSI-RS signal after receiving the third indication information.
  • the processing unit 620 is also used for ending the measurement of the relaxation state.
  • the processing unit 620 when the processing unit 620 measures the relaxation state, it finds that the relationship between the measurement amount and the first threshold does not satisfy the first criterion, and may send fourth indication information to the network device.
  • the fourth indication information may indicate that the measurement amount The relationship with the first threshold does not satisfy the first criterion, and the measurement quantity may be a measurement quantity corresponding to the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information, or may be a measurement quantity of a reference signal of a type randomly measured by the processing unit 620 itself , which is not limited in this application.
  • the transceiving unit 610 may decide to end the measurement relaxation state by sending the fourth indication information, or may wait for fifth indication information from the network device, where the fifth indication information is used to instruct the processing unit 620 to end the measurement relaxation state.
  • the third indication information sent by the network device may include timer configuration, and the timer configuration may also be the default configuration of the processing unit 620.
  • the transceiver unit 610 After receiving the third indication information, the transceiver unit 610 enters The timer is started while measuring the relaxation state, and when the timer reaches the first duration, the processing unit 620 ends the measurement of the relaxation state. It should be noted that, if within the first duration, the processing unit 620 finds that the relationship between the measurement amount and the first threshold does not satisfy the first criterion, it may send fourth indication information to the network device, and decide to end the measurement relaxation state or wait for the network device to The fifth instruction message ends measuring the relaxation state.
  • the third indication information sent by the network device may include a timer configuration, and the timer configuration may also be a default configuration of the processing unit 620 .
  • the transceiver unit 610 After receiving the third indication information, the transceiver unit 610 starts the timer while entering the measurement relaxation state, and before the timer reaches the first duration, the processing unit 620 finds that the relationship between the measurement quantity and the first threshold value does not satisfy the first criterion, The fourth indication information is not sent to the network equipment, and when the timer reaches the first duration, the transceiver unit 610 sends the fourth indication information to the network equipment, decides to end the measurement relaxation state or waits for the fifth indication information of the network equipment to end the measurement relaxation state.
  • the network device receives the fourth indication information, or when the network device judges load balancing, or, according to the measurement result reported by the transceiver unit 610, it determines that the network
  • the device may send fifth indication information to the transceiver unit, instructing the processing unit 620 to end the measurement relaxation state.
  • the fifth indication information may be a dedicated RRC message, or may be a MAC CE message or the like.
  • the communication device 600 may be the network device in the method embodiment 300 above, or a chip for realizing the functions of the network device in the method embodiment above. It should be understood that the communication apparatus 600 may correspond to the steps corresponding to the network device in the method 300 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 600 includes:
  • the transceiving unit 610 is configured to send first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first reference signal type.
  • the processing unit 620 is configured to determine, according to the second indication information, that the terminal device can enter the measurement relaxed state.
  • the first reference signal type may include a synchronization signal block (Synchronization Signal Block, SSB), and a channel state information reference signal (Channel State Information-Reference Signal, CSI-RS).
  • SSB Synchronization Signal Block
  • CSI-RS Channel State Information-Reference Signal
  • the terminal device measures the SSB signal, and in the connected state, the terminal device can measure the SSB signal, and the terminal device can also measure the CSI-RS signal.
  • the first indication information may be used to indicate that the terminal device needs to perform a first determination on the reference signal of the first reference signal type, and the first determination is that the terminal device needs to determine the measured value and Whether the relationship between the first thresholds satisfies the first criterion.
  • the transceiver unit 610 when the terminal device is in the connected state, sends the first indication information to the terminal device, and the first indication information may be sent through a broadcast message or through dedicated signaling, for example, The radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) reconfiguration message, or the medium access control (Medium Access Control, MAC) control element (Control Element, CE) MAC CE, etc., this embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
  • the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to measure the SSB signal, or measure the CSI-RS signal, or measure other possible types of reference signals. It should be noted that the measurement is used for the first determination .
  • all the measurement configuration information received by the terminal device indicates that the terminal device uses the SSB signal to perform measurement or report, but the terminal device does not receive the first indication information but
  • the SSB signal is used for the measurement for the first determination
  • all the measurement configuration information received by the terminal device indicates that the terminal device uses the CSI-RS signal for measurement or reporting.
  • the device does not receive the first indication information but uses the CSI-RS signal by default to perform measurement for the first determination. It should be noted that other measurement requirements are configured in the measurement configuration information.
  • the SSB signal when the terminal device is in the connected state, the SSB signal is used by default to perform the measurement for the first determination, and the network device does not need to send the first indication information to indicate the first reference signal type.
  • the transceiver unit 610 broadcasts first indication information to the terminal device.
  • the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information is an SSB signal
  • the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information is a CSI-RS signal.
  • the measurement may be continued according to the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information received in the idle state.
  • the terminal device side protocol is adaptively modified, so that the terminal device performs the measurement and determination of the first determination after receiving the first indication information, without special measurement configuration information to configure.
  • the first indication information may also be used to indicate the first threshold or offset information. It should be noted that if the first indication information is used to indicate the offset information, the terminal device may be in the idle state or In the inactive state, the threshold information has been received once, and the terminal device combines the offset information with the threshold information for subsequent judgment.
  • the first threshold may be a first threshold reconfigured when the terminal device enters the connected state.
  • the first threshold may be a threshold when the terminal device is in the idle state.
  • the transceiver unit 610 sends the first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information indicates the first threshold, or the first indication information indicates the first threshold
  • the offset amount, the first threshold value, or the first offset amount is the first threshold value or offset amount related to the SSB signal
  • the terminal device performs the measurement for the first determination on the SSB signal by default, if the first If the threshold, or the offset of the first threshold is the first threshold or offset related to the CSI-RS, the terminal device performs measurement on the CSI-RS signal for the first determination by default.
  • the transceiving unit 610 is further configured to receive second indication information sent by the terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the result of the first determination.
  • the terminal device determines that the relationship between the first measurement amount and the first threshold satisfies the first criterion, and the terminal device sends second indication information to the transceiver unit 610, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first measurement amount and the first threshold A threshold relationship satisfies the first criterion.
  • the terminal device can perform n measurements on the serving cell and report the measurement results that meet the first criterion. The n measurements can be sorted according to the measurement time.
  • the terminal device may also perform measurements on the m neighboring cells, and report the measurement results satisfying the first criterion.
  • the terminal device determines that the relationship between the first measurement amount and the first threshold does not satisfy the first criterion, and the terminal device sends second indication information to the transceiver unit 610, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first measurement amount and the first threshold.
  • the relationship of the first threshold does not meet the first criterion.
  • the terminal device can perform n measurements on the serving cell and report the measurement results that do not meet the first criterion. The n measurements can be sorted according to the measurement time , optionally, the terminal device may also perform measurements on m neighboring cells, and report the measurement results that do not satisfy the first criterion.
  • the terminal device determines whether the relationship between the first measurement amount and the first threshold satisfies the first criterion, and the terminal device sends second indication information to the transceiver unit 610, the second indication information is used to indicate the first measurement amount and Whether the relationship of the first threshold satisfies the first criterion.
  • the terminal device may perform n measurements on the serving cell, and report whether each of the n measurement results meets the first criterion. The n measurements may be based on the measurement
  • the terminal device may also measure m neighboring cells, and report whether the measurement results of the m neighboring cells satisfy the first criterion.
  • the second indication information may be sent to the transceiver unit 610 through a terminal device auxiliary information message, or may be sent to the transceiver unit 610 through MAC CE information.
  • the terminal device may wait for the first time and then send the second indication information again.
  • the time may be sent to the terminal device by the transceiver unit 610 before, or may be a default value of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may also stop sending the second indication information to the transceiver unit 610 after it still does not receive the third indication information from the transceiver unit 610 after reporting L times, and the size of L may be equal to
  • the one sent by the terminal device may also be the default one of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device stops sending the second indication information if it receives the first indication information again, the terminal device performs measurement again and sends the second indication information according to the judgment result.
  • the transceiving unit 610 is further configured to send third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to enter the measurement relaxation state.
  • this step is optional. If the processing unit 620 determines that the terminal device cannot enter the measurement relaxation state according to the second indication information, the transceiving unit 610 may not send the third indication information to the terminal device.
  • the transceiver unit 610 receives the second indication information.
  • the processing unit 620 evaluates the approximate location and mobility information of the terminal device according to the measurement results of the serving cell in the second indication information.
  • the processing unit 620 according to the measurement result of the neighboring cell in the second indication information, judge whether handover may occur in the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 620 determines that the terminal device can perform measurement relaxation according to the second indication information, it sends third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to enter the measurement relaxation state.
  • the third indication information may be an RRC message, for example, an RRC reconfiguration message, or may be a MAC CE message, etc.
  • the content of the measurement relaxation may be frequency measurement relaxation, cell measurement relaxation, period measurement relaxation, and the like.
  • the measurement period can be relaxed, and the processing unit 620 can instruct the terminal device to relax the measurement period.
  • the original measurement period is once every 5 minutes.
  • the measurement cycle can be measured every 10 minutes.
  • the terminal device enters the measurement relaxation state it may perform measurement relaxation on a certain frequency.
  • the terminal device may not perform measurement on the frequency.
  • the terminal device may perform measurement relaxation on a certain cell.
  • the terminal device may not perform measurement on the cell.
  • the content that the terminal device enters the measurement relaxation state may also be a combination of the above three types.
  • the processing unit 620 may instruct the terminal device to measure a certain cell A once every 20 minutes. For a certain cell B, the measurement period is once every 10 minutes.
  • the content of the measurement relaxation can be specifically indicated by the third indication information of the network device, or the third indication information can indicate that the measurement relaxation state is entered and the terminal equipment side measures by default. Relaxing content.
  • the terminal device uses the SSB signal to perform measurement or the CSI-RS signal to perform measurement, and after receiving the third indication information, measurement relaxation can be performed on related measurements corresponding to the two types of reference signals.
  • the terminal device uses the SSB signal to perform measurement, receives the third indication information, and performs measurement relaxation on related measurement corresponding to the SSB signal.
  • the terminal device uses the CSI-RS signal to perform measurement, receives the third indication information, and performs measurement relaxation on related measurement corresponding to the CSI-RS signal.
  • the terminal device when it finds that the relationship between the measurement amount and the first threshold does not satisfy the first criterion when measuring the relaxed state, it may send fourth indication information to the transceiver unit 610.
  • the fourth indication information may indicate the measurement amount The relationship with the first threshold does not satisfy the first criterion, and the measurement amount may be a measurement amount corresponding to the first reference signal type indicated by the first indication information, or may be a measurement amount of a reference signal of a type randomly measured by the terminal device itself, This application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device may decide to end the measurement relaxation state by itself when sending the fourth indication information, or may wait for fifth indication information from the transceiver unit 610, where the fifth indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to end the measurement relaxation state.
  • the third indication information sent by the transceiver unit 610 may include a timer configuration, and the timer configuration may also be the default configuration of the terminal.
  • the terminal device After receiving the third indication information, the terminal device enters the measurement The timer is started while in the relaxed state, and when the timer reaches the first duration, the terminal device ends the measurement in the relaxed state. It should be noted that, if within the first duration, the terminal device finds that the relationship between the measurement amount and the first threshold does not satisfy the first criterion, it may send the fourth indication information to the transceiver unit 610, and decide to end the measurement relaxation state or wait for the network device to The fifth instruction message ends measuring the relaxation state.
  • the third indication information sent by the transceiving unit 610 may include a timer configuration, and the timer configuration may also be a terminal default.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the third indication information, it enters the measurement relaxation state and starts the timer at the same time. Before the timer reaches the first duration, the terminal device finds that the relationship between the measurement quantity and the first threshold does not satisfy the first criterion, and does not Send the fourth instruction information to the transceiver unit 610, when the timer reaches the first duration, the terminal device sends the fourth instruction information to the transceiver unit 610, and decides to end the measurement relaxation state or wait for the fifth instruction information from the transceiver unit 610 to end the measurement relaxation state.
  • the transceiver unit 610 receives the fourth indication information, or when the processing unit 620 judges load balancing, or, according to the measurement results reported by the terminal equipment, it determines that the terminal When the device does not need to perform measurement relaxation, it may send fifth indication information to the terminal device, instructing the terminal device to end the measurement relaxation state.
  • the fifth indication information may be a dedicated RRC message, or may be a MAC CE message or the like.
  • the communication device 600 may be the terminal device in the method embodiment 400 above, or a chip for realizing the functions of the terminal device in the method embodiment above. It should be understood that the communication apparatus 600 may correspond to the steps corresponding to the terminal device in the method 400 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 600 includes:
  • the transceiver unit 610 is configured to receive measurement configuration information sent by the network device.
  • a processing unit 620 configured to perform measurement according to measurement configuration information
  • each measurement object corresponds to a measurement identifier
  • each reporting configuration corresponds to a measurement reporting identifier
  • each measurement identifier is associated with a measurement object identifier and a measurement reporting identifier.
  • the processing unit 620 may determine the corresponding measurement object and reporting configuration according to the received measurement identifier.
  • At least one item of frequency information, cell information, reference signal information, etc. is configured in each measurement object in the measurement object list.
  • a new event is defined in the reporting configuration list, and the content indicated by the event may be similar to the content indicated by the first indication information in method 300.
  • the event may be: the first criterion judgment event, Specifically, it includes: an event judged by a stationary criterion, an event judged not at the edge of a cell, and the like.
  • This configuration can be defined as reporting when entering the first criterion event, or reporting when leaving the first criterion event, or can be defined as reporting both entering and leaving the first criterion event. It may be defined that the stationary criterion event corresponds to the first event, and the not-at-the-cell-edge criterion event may be defined as the second event.
  • the network device instructs the processing unit 620 to trigger the report based on the event, or report periodically, that is, for example, when the configuration triggers the report based on the event, the processing unit 620 enters the first event or the second event, and sends The network device reports, or, the processing unit 620 reports to the network device when leaving the first event or the second event, or the processing unit 620 reports both entering or leaving the first event or the second event.
  • periodic reporting is configured, for example, the transceiver unit 610 periodically reports entering the first event or leaving the first event to the network device, or, the transceiver unit 610 periodically reports entering the second event or leaving the second event to the network device .
  • the processing unit 620 judges that the following formula is satisfied and reports:
  • the first reference signal type is SSB, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to SSB:
  • S SearchDeltaP is the first threshold value corresponding to the SSB signal
  • Srxlev is the reference signal receiving power (Reference Signal Receiving Power, RSRP) quality of the current serving cell, that is, the first measured value
  • RSRP Reference Signal Receiving Power
  • the first reference signal type is CSI-RS, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to CSI-RS:
  • S SearchDeltaPCSI is the first threshold indicated by the first indication information received in the connected state
  • S SearchDeltaP is the threshold received when the idle state or the inactive state
  • the threshold is the threshold of the SSB signal
  • the offset CSI is the offset received in the connected state.
  • the processing unit 620 judges that the following formula is satisfied and then reports:
  • S SearchDeltaP is the first threshold value corresponding to the SSB signal
  • Srxlev is the reference signal receiving power (Reference Signal Receiving Power, RSRP) quality of the current serving cell, that is, the first measured value
  • RSRP Reference Signal Receiving Power
  • the first reference signal type is CSI-RS, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to CSI-RS:
  • S SearchDeltaPCSI is the first threshold indicated by the first indication information received in the connected state
  • S SearchDeltaP is the threshold received in the idle state or inactive state
  • the threshold is the threshold of the SSB signal
  • the offset CSI is the offset received in the connected state.
  • the processing unit 620 judges that it satisfies the following formula and reports it:
  • the first reference signal type is SSB, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to SSB:
  • Squal>S SearchThresholdQ if S SearchThresholdQ is configured.
  • S searchThresholdP is the first threshold
  • S SearchThresholdQ is also the first threshold
  • Srxlev is the RSRP quality of the current serving cell
  • Squal is the reference RSRQ quality of the current serving cell.
  • the first reference signal type is CSI-RS, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to CSI-RS:
  • S SearchThresholdP and S SearchThresholdQ are the thresholds received when idle state or inactive state
  • the threshold is the threshold value of SSB signal
  • offset CSI is the offset amount received when connected state
  • S SearchDeltaPCSI and S SearchThresholdQCSI are the first thresholds indicated by the first indication information received in the connected state.
  • the processing unit 620 judges that the following formula is satisfied and then reports:
  • the first reference signal type is SSB, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to SSB:
  • S searchThresholdP is the first threshold
  • S SearchThresholdQ is also the first threshold
  • Srxlev is the RSRP quality of the current serving cell
  • Squal is the reference RSRQ quality of the current serving cell.
  • the first reference signal type is CSI-RS, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to CSI-RS:
  • S SearchThresholdP and S SearchThresholdQ are the thresholds received when idle state or inactive state
  • the threshold is the threshold value of SSB signal
  • offset CSI is the offset amount received when connected state
  • S SearchDeltaPCSI and S SearchThresholdQCSI are the first thresholds indicated by the first indication information received in the connected state.
  • the configuration of the first reference information type may be included, which is used to indicate which reference signal to use, and the first reference signal type includes: SSB, CSI-RS, about the first reference
  • the first reference signal type includes: SSB, CSI-RS, about the first reference
  • SSB SSB
  • CSI-RS CSI-RS
  • the terminal device may indicate the capability information of the terminal device to the network device after the network device establishes the RRC connection, and the capability information may include narrowband terminal capability, and/or , the ability to support connection state measurement relaxation, etc., which are not particularly limited in this application.
  • the network device network device network device network device network device network device network device network device network device processing unit 620 measures the reference signal of the neighboring cell or the serving cell according to the first reference signal type in the measurement configuration information.
  • the transceiver unit 610 is also used for performing measurement reporting.
  • the processing unit 620 judges whether the first criterion time is met according to the measurement result, and reports the measurement to the network device according to the configuration in the measurement configuration information.
  • the transceiving unit 610 is further configured to receive third indication information sent by the network device, where the third indication information is used to instruct the processing unit 620 to enter the measurement relaxation state.
  • the network device judges that the processing unit 620 satisfies entering the first or second time according to the measurement report message sent by the transceiver unit 610 , it sends third indication information to the transceiver unit 610 .
  • the indication information may be included in the re-sent measurement configuration information.
  • it may be embodied in the measurement configuration information including frequency information or cell list information to be measured. Compared with configuration information, there are fewer frequencies and cells to be measured, so that the processing unit 620 can measure fewer frequencies, or a smaller number of cells, etc., which is equivalent to entering a measurement relaxation state.
  • the embodiment may be in the measurement configuration information, specifically instructing the processing unit 620 to measure the relaxation content, and for the content, please refer to the relevant description of the corresponding device in the method 300 .
  • the third indication information may be included in the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the instruction information may also be sent as a separate message, instructing the processing unit 620 to specifically measure relaxation content.
  • the processing unit 620 may also be sent as a separate message, instructing the processing unit 620 to specifically measure relaxation content.
  • the relevant description of the corresponding device in the method 300 please refer to the relevant description of the corresponding device in the method 300.
  • the processing unit 620 is also used for determining to end the measurement of the relaxation state.
  • the processing unit 620 may report the first leaving event or the second leaving event to the network device, and may also send indication information to the network device separately , indicating to leave the first event or the second event.
  • the processing unit 620 may decide to stop the relaxation and send a measurement report message to the network device to notify the network device that the processing unit 620 leaves the first or second event.
  • the measurement relaxation may be stopped.
  • the stop measurement relaxation instruction sent by the network device can be included in the RRC reconfiguration, or in the MAC CE.
  • the indication can be made for a certain cell or frequency or a certain measurement object.
  • the communication device 600 may be the network device in the method embodiment 400 above, or a chip for realizing the functions of the network device in the method embodiment above. It should be understood that the communications apparatus 600 may correspond to the steps corresponding to the network device in the method 400 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 600 includes:
  • the transceiver unit 610 is configured to send measurement configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 620 is configured to determine that the terminal device enters the measurement relaxation state.
  • each measurement object corresponds to a measurement identifier
  • each reporting configuration corresponds to a measurement reporting identifier
  • each measurement identifier is associated with a measurement object identifier and a measurement reporting identifier.
  • the terminal device can determine the corresponding measurement object and report configuration according to the received measurement identifier.
  • At least one item of frequency information, cell information, reference signal information, etc. is configured in each measurement object in the measurement object list.
  • a new event is defined in the reporting configuration list, and the content indicated by the event may be similar to the content indicated by the first indication information in method 300.
  • the event may be: the first criterion judgment event, Specifically, it includes: a stationary criterion judgment event (the first event), a not-at-the-cell-edge judgment event (the second event), and the like.
  • This configuration can be defined as reporting when entering the first criterion event, or reporting when leaving the first criterion event, or can be defined as reporting both entering and leaving the first criterion event. It may be defined that the stationary criterion event corresponds to the first event, and the not-at-the-cell-edge criterion event may be defined as the second event.
  • the processing unit 620 instructs the terminal device to trigger the report based on the event, or to report periodically, that is, for example, when the configuration triggers the report based on the event, the terminal device judges that the event or the second When an event occurs, it will report to the network device, or if the terminal device leaves an event that does not meet the static first criterion or the second event occurs, it will report to the transceiver unit 610, or the terminal device will enter or leave the first event or the second event. report.
  • the terminal device When periodic reporting is configured, for example, the terminal device periodically reports to the transceiver unit 610 whether the static criterion event enters the first event or leaves the first event, or the terminal device periodically reports to the transceiver unit whether the event enters the second event or Leave the second event.
  • Both the first event and the second event include an entry condition and an exit condition, specifically as in the above-mentioned embodiment.
  • the terminal device judges that it satisfies the following formula and then reports:
  • the first reference signal type is SSB, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to SSB:
  • S SearchDeltaP is the first threshold value corresponding to the SSB signal
  • Srxlev is the reference signal receiving power (Reference Signal Receiving Power, RSRP) quality of the current serving cell, that is, the first measured value
  • RSRP Reference Signal Receiving Power
  • the first reference signal type is CSI-RS, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to CSI-RS:
  • S SearchDeltaPCSI is the first threshold indicated by the first indication information received in the connected state
  • S SearchDeltaP is the threshold received when the idle state or the inactive state
  • the threshold is the threshold of the SSB signal
  • the offset CSI is the offset received in the connected state.
  • the terminal device judges that it satisfies the following formula and reports it:
  • S SearchDeltaP is the first threshold value corresponding to the SSB signal
  • Srxlev is the reference signal receiving power (Reference Signal Receiving Power, RSRP) quality of the current serving cell, that is, the first measured value
  • RSRP Reference Signal Receiving Power
  • the first reference signal type is CSI-RS, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to CSI-RS:
  • S SearchDeltaPCSI is the first threshold indicated by the first indication information received in the connected state
  • S SearchDeltaP is the threshold received in the idle state or inactive state
  • the threshold is the threshold of the SSB signal
  • the offset CSI is the offset received in the connected state.
  • the terminal device judges that it satisfies the following formula and reports it:
  • the first reference signal type is SSB, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to SSB:
  • Squal>S SearchThresholdQ if S SearchThresholdQ is configured.
  • S searchThresholdP is the first threshold
  • S SearchThresholdQ is also the first threshold
  • Srxlev is the RSRP quality of the current serving cell
  • Squal is the reference RSRQ quality of the current serving cell.
  • the first reference signal type is CSI-RS, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to CSI-RS:
  • S SearchThresholdP and S SearchThresholdQ are the thresholds received when idle state or inactive state
  • the threshold is the threshold value of SSB signal
  • offset CSI is the offset amount received when connected state
  • S SearchDeltaPCSI and S SearchThresholdQCSI are the first thresholds indicated by the first indication information received in the connected state.
  • the terminal device judges that it satisfies the following formula and reports:
  • the first reference signal type is SSB, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to SSB:
  • S searchThresholdP is the first threshold
  • S SearchThresholdQ is also the first threshold
  • Srxlev is the RSRP quality of the current serving cell
  • Squal is the reference RSRQ quality of the current serving cell.
  • the first reference signal type is CSI-RS, or, according to the formula given by this event, it defaults to CSI-RS:
  • S SearchThresholdP and S SearchThresholdQ are the thresholds received when idle state or inactive state
  • the threshold is the threshold value of SSB signal
  • offset CSI is the offset amount received when connected state
  • S SearchDeltaPCSI and S SearchThresholdQCSI are the first thresholds indicated by the first indication information received in the connected state.
  • the configuration of the first reference information type may be included, which is used to indicate which reference signal to use, and the first reference signal type includes: SSB, CSI-RS, about the first reference
  • the first reference signal type includes: SSB, CSI-RS, about the first reference
  • SSB SSB
  • CSI-RS CSI-RS
  • the terminal device may indicate the capability information of the terminal device to the processing unit 620 after the processing unit 620 establishes the RRC connection, and the capability information may include narrowband terminal capability, And/or, the ability to support connection state measurement relaxation, etc., which is not particularly limited in this application.
  • Network device The transceiver unit 610 of the network device is also configured to receive a measurement report from a terminal device.
  • the terminal device judges whether the trigger condition of the event is met according to the measurement result.
  • the trigger condition can be entering or leaving the first event, or entering or leaving the second event, and sends a measurement report message to the transceiver unit 610 according to the configuration in the reporting configuration. , used to indicate that the terminal satisfies the entering or leaving the first event or the second event.
  • the transceiving unit 610 is further configured to send third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to enter the measurement relaxation state.
  • the processing unit 620 judges that the terminal device satisfies entering the first or second event according to the measurement report message sent by the terminal device, it sends a third indication message to the terminal, and the indication information may be included in the resent measurement configuration information Among them, optionally, the embodiment may be that the frequency information to be measured or cell list information is included in the measurement configuration information. Compared with the measurement configuration information previously received by the terminal device, the above information has more frequency information and the number of cells to be measured. less, so that the terminal equipment can measure fewer frequencies, or the number of cells is smaller, which is equivalent to entering the measurement relaxation state.
  • the embodiment may be the content in the measurement configuration information that specifically instructs the terminal device to measure relaxation.
  • the third indication information may be carried in an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the instruction information may also be sent as a separate message, indicating the specific content of measurement relaxation for the terminal device.
  • the instruction information may also be sent as a separate message, indicating the specific content of measurement relaxation for the terminal device.
  • the specific description please refer to the description of the corresponding device in method 300.
  • the transceiving unit 610 is further configured to send indication information indicating the end of the measurement relaxation state to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may report the first event or the second event to the transceiver unit 610, and may also send indication information to the network device separately. , indicating to leave the first event or the second event.
  • the terminal device may decide to stop relaxing and send a measurement report message to the transceiver unit 610 for notifying the processing unit 620 that the terminal device leaves the first or second event.
  • the measurement relaxation may be stopped.
  • the stop measurement relaxation indication sent by the transceiver unit 610 may be included in the RRC reconfiguration, or may be in the MAC CE. The indication can be made for a certain cell or frequency or a certain measurement object.
  • the communication device 600 may be the terminal device in the method embodiment 500 above, or a chip for realizing the functions of the terminal device in the method embodiment above. It should be understood that the communication apparatus 600 may correspond to the steps corresponding to the terminal device in the method 500 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 600 includes:
  • the transceiver unit 610 is configured to receive the system message sent by the distributed unit.
  • the processing unit 620 is configured to determine that access to the first cell is prohibited according to the first information in the system message.
  • the transceiver unit 610 receives the first message in the system message, and the processing unit 620 determines that the first cell cannot be accessed according to its own 1R or 2R capability. Further, the processing unit 620 performs the same-frequency or different-frequency cell reselection.
  • the communication device 600 may be the distributed unit in the method embodiment 500 above, or a chip for realizing the functions of the distributed unit in the method embodiment above. It should be understood that the communication device 600 may correspond to the steps corresponding to the distributed unit in the method 500 of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 600 includes:
  • the transceiver unit 610 is configured to receive the first information sent by the centralized unit.
  • the processing unit 620 is configured to add the first information to the system message.
  • the transceiver unit is also used to send system messages to the terminal equipment.
  • the communication device 600 may be the centralized unit in the method embodiment 500 above, or a chip for realizing the functions of the centralized unit in the method embodiment above. It should be understood that the communication device 600 may correspond to the steps corresponding to the centralized unit in the method 500 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 600 includes:
  • the transceiver unit 610 is configured to send the first information to the distributed unit.
  • the processing unit 620 is configured to determine that the terminal device is prohibited from accessing the first cell.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a communication device 700 according to an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 700 includes: a transceiver 710 , a processor 720 and a memory 730 .
  • the memory 730 is used to store instructions.
  • the processor 720 is coupled with the memory 730, and is configured to execute instructions stored in the memory, so as to execute the method provided by the foregoing embodiments of the present application.
  • the transceiver 710 in the communication device 700 may correspond to the transceiver unit 610 in the communication device 600
  • the processor 720 in the communication device 700 may correspond to the processing unit 620 in the communication device 600 .
  • the memory 730 and the processor 720 may be combined into one processing device, and the processor 720 is configured to execute the program codes stored in the memory 730 to implement the above functions.
  • the memory 730 may also be integrated in the processor 720 , or be independent of the processor 720 .
  • the disclosed systems, devices and methods may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components can be combined or May be integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Part or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, each unit may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions are realized in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disc and other media that can store program codes. .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供了一种通信方法和装置，该通信方法包括：终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示终端设备对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行第一判定，第一判定用于判定第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系是否满足第一准则；终端设备在连接态下对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量，获取第一测量值；终端设备向网络设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足第一准则。本申请提供的通信方法，指示终端设备使用哪种参考信号测量，终端设备根据测量结果判断是否满足第一准则并上报给网络设备，网络设备指示终端设备测量放松时，实现终端设备在连接态的低功耗。

Description

通信方法和通信装置
本申请要求于2021年07月28日提交中国专利局、申请号为202110854658.9、申请名称为“通信方法和通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
本申请要求于2021年10月20日提交中国专利局、申请号为202111223091.1、申请名称为“通信方法和通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信领域，更具体的，涉及一种通信方法和通信装置。
背景技术
随着无线通信的快速发展，为满足和丰富人们的日益增长的需求，第五代移动通信(5th Generation，5G)系统应运而生。能够有效的应对未来爆炸性的移动数据流量增长，并支持海量的设备连接和不断涌现的各类新业务。
物联网(Internet of Things，IoT)做为5G的组成部分，其市场需求增长迅猛。其中Machine to Machine，M2M，是机器与机器之间通过无线网络互相传递信息和数据的简称，是IoT发展的重要方向。M2M设备多是比较小巧、电池供电的系统，如智能抄表系统，需要对水、电煤气等使用情况进行周期性监测并上报。在5G中，RedCap(reduced capability，减少能力的)终端也是一种IoT设备，具有低功耗低复杂度的要求。因此，在物联网系统中，需要设计新的方案使得终端设备实现较低功耗。
发明内容
本申请提供一种通信方法和通信装置，当终端设备处于连接态时，通过第一指示信息指示终端设备测量的第一参考信号类型，终端设备根据第一指示信息对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量，获取第一测量值，终端设备确定第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足第一准则，则向网络设备上报。使得连接态的终端设备也可以进行第一准则的判断和上报。在某些情况下，网络设备可以指示终端设备进入测量放松状态，使得终端设备在连接态时实现低功耗。
第一方面，提供了一种通信方法，包括：终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示终端设备对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行第一判定，第一判定用于判定第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系是否满足第一准则；终端设备在连接态下根据第一指示信息对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量，以获取第一测量值；终端设备向网络设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足第一准则。
通过向终端设备发送第一指示信息，使终端设备获知用哪个参考信号进行测量，然后判断测量得到的第一测量值和第一阈值的关系是否满足第一准则，使连接态的终端设备实现对是否满足第一准则的判定，并向网络设备进行测量结果上报。
该第一准则可以包括静止准则和/或不在小区边缘准则。该第一准则可以用来评估终端设备的大概位置以及移动性信息。
该第一指示信息由网络设备通过广播或者专用信令向终端设备发送，该第一指示信息可以以测量配置信息或上报配置信息中新定义的测量事件的形式指示。
网络设备向终端设备发送的第一指示信息可以用多种形式进行指示，提供了一种灵活的指示方法。
该第一参考信号类型可以包括同步信号块SSB和/或信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，终端设备接收网络设备发送的第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示终端设备在连接态下进入测量放松状态，终端设备在连接态下进入测量放松状态，可以降低终端设备在连接态的功耗。
可选的,该第三指示信息还可以包括定时器信息，该定时器信息用于指示终端设备进入测量放松状态的时长。在该定时器运行期间，终端设备进行测量放松。若在定时器运行期间，终端设备判断不满足第一准则，或者定时器超时后，则终端设备停止进行测量放松。这种方式加强了网络设备对终端设备的控制性，使得测量放松都在网络设备的控制下进行。
另一方面，网络设备也可以主动向终端设备发送停止或者开始测量放松指示。实现了网络设备的控制性。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该第一指示信息还用于指示第一阈值。可选的，该第一阈值可以为连接态下第一指示信息中指示的。可选的，该第一阈值可以为空闲态时的阈值，进入连接态时，默认还使用空闲态的第一阈值。可选的，第一指示信息指示偏置量信息，该第一阈值等效于空闲态阈值和偏置量的和。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该第一测量值为终端设备对服务小区的第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量得到的测量值，或，该第一测量值为终端设备对邻小区的第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量得到的测量值。
网络设备收到测量结果后，可以评估终端设备的大概位置以及移动性信息，进而判断是否使能终端设备进行连接态测量放松，使得网络设备根据终端设备的通信状态进行指示，实现了网络设备的控制性。结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该第三指示信息中可以包括具体的测量放松的内容，例如，对测量周期进行放松，以更长的周期进行测量，对测量小区进行放松，不测量某些小区，对测量的频率进行放松，不测量某些频率。
第三指示信息指示具体的测量放松内容，可以使终端设备根据网络设备的指示灵活的确定测量放松的内容，实现精准的测量放松，也可以实现网络设备的控制性。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该第一指示信息或第三指示信息还用于指示第一参考信号类型的参考信号在测量放松状态下的测量配置，该第一参考信号类型的参考信号在测量放松状态下的测量配置包括该第一参考信号类型的参考信号在测量放松状态下的第一测量周期。
可选的，该第一指示信息还用于指示第一参考信号类型的参考信号不在测量放松状态下的测量配置，第一参考信号类型的参考信号不在测量放松状态下的测量配置包括第一参 考信号类型的参考信号不在测量放松状态下的第二测量周期。
可选的，该第一测量周期大于该第二测量周期。可以使终端设备在测量放松状态下以更长的周期测量参考信号，节省了终端设备的功耗。
作为示例，网络设备向终端设备指示对测量周期进行测量放松可以通过测量参考信号的配置信息来指示，例如给测量参考信号配置两套及两套以上测量配置信息，其中，每套测量配置信息的测量周期不同，当终端设备满足第一准则或进入测量放松状态时，网络设备可以指示终端设备使用不同的参考信号测量配置。例如，网络设备可以给终端设备配置两套SMTC(SS/PBCH block measurement timing configuration，SSB测量定时配置)配置，第一SMTC配置用于不放松测量时使用，第二SMTC配置用于放松测量时使用。同样的，网络设备也可以给CSI-RS配置类似的测量配置信息。具体的，两套SMTC配置对应一个测量频率，或者小区，或者测量对象。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第一判定用于判定第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系是否满足第一准则，包括：第一判定用于判定第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系在第一时间内满足第一准则，或，
第一判定用于判定第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系在第二时间内不满足第一准则。
即第一参考信号累心的测量值和第一阈值的关系满足或不满足第一准则的判定需要该关系达到一定的时间才能判定。
可选的，第一时间大于或等于第二时间。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，终端设备向网络设备发送的第二指示信息，可以在一次发送上报过程中，同时上报终端设备对服务小区的n次测量的测量结果，也可以同时上报终端设备对m个邻小区的测量的测量结果。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，终端设备进入测量放松状态后，当判断达到某些条件，可以自行离开测量放松状态或根据网络设备的指示离开测量放松状态。作为示例，当第一测量值和第一阈值的关系不满足第一准则的持续时间超过第二时间时，终端设备可以离开测量放松状态。应理解，该第二时间小于终端设备判断第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足第一准则的持续时间，即第一时间。设置第二时间大于第一时间，可以使终端设备更加快速的离开测量放松状态，保证终端设备在连接态的性能。
第二方面，提供了一种通信方法，包括：网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示终端设备对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行第一判定，第一判定用于判定第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系是否满足第一准则；网络设备接收终端设备发送的第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足第一准则。
通过向终端设备发送第一指示信息，使终端设备获知用哪个参考信号进行测量，然后判断测量得到的第一测量值和第一阈值的关系是否满足第一准则，使连接态的终端设备实现对是否满足第一准则的判定，并向网络设备进行测量结果上报。
该第一准则可以包括静止准则和/或不在小区边缘准则。该第一准则可以用来评估终端设备的大概位置以及移动性信息。
该第一指示信息由网络设备通过广播或者专用信令向终端设备发送，该第一指示信息也可以以测量配置中新定义的测量事件的形式指示。
该第一参考信号类型可以包括同步信号块SSB和/或信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，网络设备向终端设备发送第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示终端设备在连接态下进入测量放松状态，终端设备在连接态下进入测量放松状态，可以降低终端设备在连接态的功耗。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，该第一指示信息还用于指示第一阈值。可选的，该第一阈值可以为连接态下第一指示信息中指示的。可选的，该第一阈值可以为空闲态时的阈值，进入连接态时，默认还使用空闲态的第一阈值。可选的，第一指示信息指示偏置量信息，该第一阈值等效于空闲态阈值和偏置量的和。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，该第一测量值为终端设备对服务小区的第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量得到的测量值，或，该第一测量值为终端设备对邻小区的第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量得到的测量值。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，该第三指示信息中可以包括具体的测量放松的内容，例如，对测量周期进行放松，以更长的周期进行测量，对测量小区进行放松，不测量某些小区，对测量的频率进行放松，不测量某些频率。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，该第一指示信息或第三指示信息还用于指示第一参考信号类型的参考信号在测量放松状态下的测量配置，该第一参考信号类型的参考信号在测量放松状态下的测量配置包括该第一参考信号类型的参考信号在测量放松状态下的第一测量周期。
可选的，该第一指示信息还用于指示第一参考信号类型的参考信号不在测量放松状态下的测量配置，第一参考信号类型的参考信号不在测量放松状态下的测量配置包括第一参考信号类型的参考信号不在测量放松状态下的第二测量周期。
可选的，该第一测量周期大于该第二测量周期。可以使终端设备在测量放松状态下以更长的周期测量参考信号，节省了终端设备的功耗。
作为示例，网络设备向终端设备指示对测量周期进行测量放松可以通过测量参考信号的配置信息来指示，例如给测量参考信号配置两套及两套以上测量配置信息，其中，每套测量配置信息的测量周期不同，当终端设备满足第一准则或进入测量放松状态时，网络设备可以指示终端设备使用不同的参考信号测量配置。例如，网络设备可以给终端设备配置两套SMTC(SS/PBCH block measurement timing configuration，SSB测量定时配置)配置，第一SMTC配置用于不放松测量时使用，第二SMTC配置用于放松测量时使用。同样的，网络设备也可以给CSI-RS信号配置类似的测量配置信息。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，第一判定用于判定第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系是否满足第一准则，包括：第一判定用于判定第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系在第一时间内满足第一准则，或，
第一判定用于判定第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系在第二时间内不满足第一准则。
即第一参考信号累心的测量值和第一阈值的关系满足或不满足第一准则的判定需要 该关系达到一定的时间才能判定。
可选的，第一时间大于或等于第二时间。
第三指示信息指示具体的测量放松内容，可以使终端设备根据网络设备的指示灵活的确定测量放松的内容，实现精准的测量放松，也可以实现网络设备的控制性。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，网络设备接收的终端设备发送的第二指示信息，可以在一次发送上报过程中，同时上报终端设备对服务小区的n次测量的测量结果，也可以同时上报终端设备对m个邻小区的测量的测量结果。
网络设备收到测量结果后，可以评估终端设备的大概位置以及移动性信息，进而判断是否使能终端设备进行连接态测量放松，使得网络设备能够根据终端设备的通信状态进行指示，实现了网络设备的控制性。
第三方面，提供了一种通信装置，包括用于执行上述第一方面及其实现方式中的通信方法的各步骤的单元。
在一种设计中，该通信装置为通信芯片，该通信芯片可以包括用于发送信息或数据的输入电路或接口，以及用于接收信息或数据的输出电路或接口。
在另一种设计中，所述通信装置为通信设备(例如，终端设备等)，通信芯片可以包括用于发送信息的发射机，以及用于接收信息或数据的接收机。
第四方面，提供了一种通信装置，包括用于执行上述第二方面及其实现方式中的通信方法的各步骤的单元。
在一种设计中，该通信装置为通信芯片，该通信芯片可以包括用于发送信息或数据的输入电路或接口，以及用于接收信息或数据的输出电路或接口。
在另一种设计中，所述通信装置为通信设备(例如，网络设备等)，通信芯片可以包括用于发送信息的发射机，以及用于接收信息或数据的接收机。
第五方面，提供了一种通信设备，包括，处理器，存储器，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得该通信设备执行上述第一
方面或第二方面及其各实现方式中的通信方法。
可选地，所述处理器为一个或多个，所述存储器为一个或多个。
可选地，所述存储器可以与所述处理器集成在一起，或者所述存储器与处理器分离设
置。
可选的，该通信设备还包括，发射机(发射器)和接收机(接收器)。
第六方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序(也
可以称为代码，或指令)，当所述计算机程序被运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面或第二方面及其各实现方式中的通信方法。
第七方面，提供了一种计算机可读介质，所述计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也
可以称为代码，或指令)当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面或第二方面及其各实现方式中的通信方法。
第八方面，提供了一种通信系统，该系统包括：至少一个第三方面中任一项所述的
装置和第四方面中任一项所述的装置。
第九方面，提供了一种芯片系统，包括存储器和处理器，该存储器用于存储计算机
程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得安装有该芯片系统的 通信
设备执行上述第一方面或第二方面及其各实现方式中的通信方法。
其中，该芯片系统可以包括用于发送信息或数据的输入电路或者接口，以及用于接收
信息或数据的输出电路或者接口。
附图说明
图1是本申请实施例的系统架构的示意图。
图2是本申请实施例的通信方法的一例的示意图。
图3是本申请实施例的通信方法的又一例的示意图。
图4是本申请实施例的通信方法的另一例的示意图。
图5是本申请实施例的通信方法的再一例的示意图。
图6是本申请实施例的通信装置的一例的示意图。
图7是本申请实施例的通信装置的又一例的示意图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合附图，对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，例如：全球移动通讯(Global System of Mobile communication，GSM)系统、码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access，CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access，WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(General Packet Radio Service，GPRS)、长期演进(Long Term Evolution，LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(Frequency Division Duplex，FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(Time Division Duplex，TDD)、通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunication System，UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access，WiMAX)通信系统、未第五代(5th Generation，5G)系统或新无线(New Radio，NR)等。
本申请实施例中的终端设备可以指用户设备、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。终端设备还可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(Session Initiation Protocol，SIP)电话、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop，WLL)站、个人数字处理(Personal Digital Assistant，PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备，5G网络中的终端设备或者演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(Public Land Mobile Network，PLMN)中的终端设备等，本申请实施例对此并不限定。
本申请实施例中的接入网设备，是指将终端接入到无线网络的无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)节点(或设备)，又可以称为基站。目前，一些RAN节点的举例为：继续演进的节点B(gNB)、传输接收点(transmission reception point，TRP)、演进型节点B(evolved Node B，eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller，RNC)、节点B(Node B，NB)、基站控制器(base station controller，BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station，BTS)、家庭基站(例如，home evolved NodeB，或home Node B，HNB)、基带单元(base band unit，BBU)，或无线保真(wireless fidelity，Wifi)接入点(access point， AP)等。另外，在一种网络结构中，接入网设备可以包括集中单元(centralized unit，CU)节点、或分布单元(distributed unit，DU)节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的RAN设备。其中包括CU节点和DU节点的RAN设备将长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统中eNB的协议层拆分开，部分协议层的功能放在CU集中控制，剩下部分或全部协议层的功能分布在DU中，由CU集中控制DU。接入网设备也可以为读写器设备。
本申请实施例中的核心网设备，是指网络侧用于管理用户，数据传输以及基站配置的多种功能实体的统称，包括AMF，UPF，SMF等。等，本申请实施例并不限定。
图1是本申请实施例的系统架构。如图1所示，终端设备位于基站提供的一个或多个小区(载波)的覆盖范围内，为终端设备服务的小区可以为一个或多个。当终端设备的服务小区有多个时，终端设备可以按照载波聚合(Carrier Aggregation，CA)传输方式工作，也可以按照双连接(Dual Connectivity，DC)传输方式工作，也可以按照协作多点传输方式工作。其中，至少一个小区提供多于一种系统参数同时为终端设备提供无线资源。
图2是本申请实施例的通信方法的一例，如图所示，该方法200包括：
S210，网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息。
具体的，该第一指示信息用于指示第一参考信号类型。进一步的，该第一指示信息用于指示终端设备对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行第一判定，第一判定用于判定第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系是否满足第一准则。可选的，该第一指示信息还用于指示第一阈值，或者，偏置量信息。需要说明的是，若第一指示信息用于指示偏置量信息，则可能终端设备在空闲态或非激活态已经收到过一次阈值信息，终端设备在该阈值信息的基础上结合偏置量信息用于后续的判断。可选的，该第一阈值可以为终端设备进入连接态时重新配置的第一阈值。可选的，该第一阈值可以为终端设备在空闲态时的阈值，终端设备默认使用该空闲态时的阈值继续用于判断。
具体的，该第一参考信号类型可以包括同步信号块(Synchronization Signal Block，SSB)，信道状态信息参考信号(Channel State Information-Reference Signal，CSI-RS)。需要说明的是，当终端设备处于空闲态或非激活态时，终端设备可以被配置SSB信号，当终端设备处于连接态时，终端设备可以被配置SSB信号和/或CSI-RS信号。
需要说明的是，在空闲态或非激活态时，终端设备对SSB信号进行测量，在连接态时，终端设备可以对SSB信号进行测量，终端设备也可以对CSI-RS信号进行测量。
在某些实施例中，网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示一种第一参考信号类型。可选的，网络设备还可以在第一指示信息以外的信息中单独向终端设备发送第一阈值信息，该第一阈值信息用于指示该第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型对应的第一阈值。可选的，网络设备可以不向终端设备发送第一阈值信息，由终端设备默认第一阈值。例如，在连接态时，终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息指示第一参考信号类型为SSB信号，若终端设备未收到第一阈值信息，则终端设备默认使用空闲态时的SSB信号对应的阈值；再例如，在连接态时，终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息指示第一参考信号类型为SSB信号，终端设备还接收到网络设备发送的第一阈值信息，则终端设备使用该第一阈值信息指示的第一阈值判断在使用SSB信号进行测量的测量值是否满足第一准则；又例如，在连接态时，终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息指示第一参考信号类型为 CSI-RS信号，终端设备还接收到网络设备发送的第一阈值信息，则终端设备使用该第一阈值信息指示的第一阈值判断在使用CSI-RS信号进行测量的测量值是否满足第一准则。需要说明的是，该第一阈值信息可以包括在系统消息中，该第一指示信息和该第一阈值信息为两条不同的消息。
在某些实施例中，网络设备向终端设备发送一个第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示一种参考信号类型和该参考信号类型对应的阈值。在一种可能的实现方式中，预定义多个字段，每个字段对应一种参考信号类型，每个字段对应一条第一指示信息，该字段的值为其对应的参考信号类型的阈值。例如，预定义两个字段，字段A和字段B，字段A对应SSB信号，字段B对应CSI-RS信号，当终端设备接收到一个第一指示信息，该第一指示信息位于字段A，则该第一指示信息用于指示使用SSB信号进行测量，字段A的值为SSB信号对应的阈值，终端设备使用字段A对应的阈值判断在使用SSB信号进行测量的测量值是否满足第一准则。
在某些实施例中，网络设备向终端设备发送两个或两个以上第一指示信息，其中，每个第一指示信息用于指示一种参考信号类型和该参考信号类型对应的阈值。例如，预定义两个字段，字段A和字段B，字段A对应SSB信号，字段B对应CSI-RS信号，当终端设备接收到两个第一指示信息，分别位于字段A和字段B，则终端设备可以从两个第一指示信息指示的参考信号类型中选择一个进行第一准则的判断。例如，当终端设备选择使用SSB信号，终端设备使用字段A对应的阈值判断在使用SSB信号进行测量的测量值是否满足第一准则；当终端设备选择使用CSI-RS信号，终端设备使用字段B对应的阈值判断在使用CSI-RS信号进行测量的测量值是否满足第一准则。
在某些实施例中，当终端设备处于连接态时，该第一指示信息可以通过广播或专用信令单独发送，该专用信令可以为无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control，RRC)重配置消息，或媒体接入控制(Medium Access Control,MAC)控制元素(Control Element，CE)MAC CE等消息，本申请实施例对此不做特别限定。
在某些实施例中，当终端设备处于连接态时，该第一指示信息可以包括在测量配置信息或者上报配置信息中，该第一指示信息指示的内容可以以基于事件触发上报或者周期性上报的事件被定义在上报列表中。该第一指示信息也可以承载在RRC重配置消息中。
在某些实施例中，该第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型可以为隐式的指示，例如，该终端设备在连接态时，终端设备收到的测量配置信息中全部都是指示终端设备使用SSB信号进行测量或上报时，终端设备未收到该第一指示信息但默认使用SSB信号进行用于第一判定的测量，或者，该终端设备在连接态时，终端设备收到的测量配置信息中全部都是指示终端设备使用CSI-RS信号进行测量或者上报时，终端设备未收到第一指示信息但默认使用CSI-RS信号进行用于第一判定的测量。
需要说明的是，该测量配置信息中配置了其他方面的测量需求。再例如，该终端设备在连接态时，默认使用SSB信号进行用于第一判定的测量，不需要网络设备发送第一指示信息进行第一参考信号类型的指示。
需要说明的是，若接收到第一指示信息，则不采用默认的SSB信号进行第一判定的测量，对应的，根据第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型对该类型的参考信号进行第一判定的测量。再例如，该终端设备在空闲态或者非激活态时，网络设备向终端设备广播第 一指示信息，可选的，该第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型为SSB信号，可选的，该第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS信号。对应的，当终端设备由空闲态或者非激活态进入连接态时，可以根据空闲态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型继续进行测量。
具体的，该第一准则可以包括静止准则，不在小区边缘准则。需要说明的是，该静止准则和不在小区边缘准则可以从一定程度上评估终端设备的大概位置和移动性信息。
具体的，该第一测量值和第一阈值(或第一阈值的偏置量)的关系满足静止准则，则第一参考信号类型的参考信号的第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足下列关系：
对于第一参考信号类型为SSB信号：
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)<S SearchDeltaP，其中，S SearchDeltaP是与SSB信号相对应的第一阈值，即使用SSB信号进行测量时，使用该阈值评估准则。Srxlev为当前服务小区的参考信号接收功率(Reference Signal Receiving Power，RSRP)质量，即第一测量值，Srxlev Ref为当前服务小区的参考RSRP质量。
可选的，当终端设备测得的第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足上述公式或静止准则的维持时间大于或等于第一时间后，终端设备判断SSB信号的第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足静止准则，需要说明的是，该第一时间具体名称可以为TSearchDeltaP或Tin，本申请实施例对第一时间的名称不做限定。
需要说明的是，该第一时间可以为网络设备向终端设备配置的满足静止准则的维持时间。
需要说明的是，该第一时间可以为在空闲态网络设备向终端设备配置的时间。该第一时间也可以为在连接态网络设备向终端设备配置的时间。需要说明的是，在空闲态和连接态网络设备向终端设备配置的第一时间可以相同，也可以不同。可选的，若在连接态时网络设备不向终端设备配置第一时间或者网络设备指示终端设备使用空闲态或者广播中的配置时，则终端设备可以使用在空闲态时配置的第一时间。
需要说明的是，网络设备也可以向终端设备配置不满足静止准则的维持时间第二时间，用于终端设备判断是否离开测量放松状态，该第二时间具体名称可以为Tout，本申请对此不做限定。本申请将在下文对第二时间展开描述，在此不再赘述。
需要说明的是，第一时间可以大于第二时间，这样可以更加快速的离开测量放松状态，保证终端设备在连接态的性能。可选的，该第一时间也可以等于第二时间，该第一时间也可以小于第二时间，本申请实施例对此不做限定。
可选的，该满足静止准则的维持时间第一时间和不满足静止准则的维持时间第二时间可以通过RRC消息进行配置。可选的，该满足静止准则的维持时间第一时间和不满足静止准则的维持时间第二时间可以通过测量配置中的报告配置进行配置，即网络设备可以向终端设备同时发送第一时间和第二时间的配置信息，具体的，网络设备向终端设备同时配置第一时间和第二时间的一种方式可以为第一时间和第二时间为一个测量事件的两个触发时间。
可选的，若该测量值和第一阈值的关系在第三时间内一直不满足第一准则，终端设备则将驻留小区或者服务小区的Srxlev设置为Srxlev Ref。可选的，该第三时间是网络设备向终端设备指示的。可选的，该第三时间是终端设备默认的。第三时间可以与第一时间或者 第二时间相同。需要说明的是，对于不在小区边缘准则也有类似的维持时间的配置，可以参考上述静止准则的维持时间的配置，本申请实施例在此不再赘述。
对于第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS信号：
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)<S SearchDeltaPCSI，或者，
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)<S SearchDeltaP+offset CSI，其中，S SearchDeltaPCSI为在连接态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一阈值，S SearchDeltaP为空闲态或非激活态时收到的阈值，在某些实施例中，该阈值为SSB信号的阈值，offset CSI为在连接态时收到的偏置量。具体的，阈值与偏置量的名称在本申请实施例只表示一种名称的示例，也可以使用其他名称，本申请实施例对此不做限定。
具体的，该第一测量值和第一阈值(或第一阈值的偏置量)的关系满足不在小区边缘准则，则第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足下列关系：
对于第一参考信号类型为SSB信号：
Srxlev>S searchThresholdP且，
Squal>S SearchThresholdQ,如果配置了S SearchThresholdQ。其中，S searchThresholdP为第一阈值，
S SearchThresholdQ也为第一阈值，Srxlev为当前服务小区的RSRP质量，Squal为当前服务小
区的参考RSRQ质量。
对于第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS信号：
Srxlev>S SearchThresholdP+offset CSI,且，
Squal>S SearchThresholdQ+offset CSI，如果配置了S SearchThresholdQ，
或者，
Srxlev>S SearchThresholdPCSI,且,
Squal>S SearchThresholdQCSI,如果配置了S SearchThresholdQCSI。其中，S SearchThresholdP和S SearchThresholdQ为空闲态或非激活态时收到的阈值，在某些实施例中，该阈值为SSB信号的阈值，offset CSI为在连接态时收到的偏置量，S SearchDeltaPCSI、S SearchThresholdQCSI为在连接态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一阈值。其中空闲态收到的阈值为系统消息中广播的阈值。
需要说明的是，在某些实施例中，终端设备在空闲态时根据广播的SSB信号的阈值进行第一判定，当终端设备由空闲态进入连接态时，网络设备可以指示终端设备测量的参考信号的类型为SSB信号或CSI-RS信号，当指示测量的信号为SSB信号时，可以延用空闲态时的SSB信号的阈值，也可以重新指示SSB信号的第一阈值，当指示测量的信号为CSI-RS信号时，可以在空闲态的SSB信号的阈值的基础上，指示偏置量，也可以重新指示CSI-RS信号的第一阈值，本申请对此不做特别的限定。
需要说明的是，在某些情况下，网络设备也可以指示终端设备测量是否满足其他准则，本申请对此不做限定。可选的，该其他准则可以辅助网络设备判断是否使终端设备进入测量放松状态。
S220，终端设备在连接态下根据第一指示信息对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量，以获取第一测量值。
具体的，终端设备接收第一指示信息，确定用于进行第一判定的第一参考信号类型，终端设备对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量。
终端设备可以对服务小区进行n次测量，该n次测量可以按照测量的时间进行排列，该n大于或等于1。
终端设备可以对服务小区的m个邻区进行测量，该m大于或等于1。
S230，终端设备向网络设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足第一准则。
在某些实施例中，该第二指示信息作为单独的信令向网络设备发送，可以通过终端设备辅助信息(UEAssisitance Information)消息来发送给网络设备，也可以通过MAC CE信息发送给网络设备。该第二指示信息用于指示第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足第一准则，可选的，终端设备可以对服务小区进行至少n次测量，并上报其中的满足第一准则的测量结果，该n次测量可以按照测量的时间进行排序，可选的，该终端设备也可以对m个邻区进行测量，并上报其中的满足第一准则的测量结果。
在某些实施例中，该第二指示信息包括在终端设备的测量报告中向网络设备发送。可选的，终端设备可以对服务小区进行n次测量，并上报其中的满足第一准则的测量结果，该n次测量可以按照测量的时间进行排序，可选的，该终端设备也可以对m个邻区进行测量，并上报其中的满足第一准则的测量结果。
在某些实施例中，终端设备上报n个服务小区的测量结果，这n个服务小区的测量结果可以为满足准则的n个结果，或者，满足准则后，上报的n个测量结果中包含不满足准则的测量结果。
在某些实施例中，当满足第一准则后，终端设备上报m个邻区测量结果。上报所述结果可以使得网络设备获取终端设备的更多信息，来判断是否准许终端进行测量放松。
S240，网络设备向终端设备发送第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示终端设备进入测量放松状态。
需要说明的是，该步骤为可选的，若网络设备根据第二指示信息判定终端设备不能进入测量放松状态，则网络设备可以不向终端设备发送第三指示信息。
具体的，网络设备接收第二指示信息，可选的，网络设备根据第二指示信息中对服务小区的测量结果对终端设备的大概位置以及移动性信息进行评估，可选的，网络设备根据第二指示信息中对邻区的测量结果，判断终端设备是否可能会发生切换。
具体的，网络设备根据第二指示信息确定终端设备可以进行测量放松时，向终端设备发送第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示终端设备进入测量放松状态。该第三指示信息可以为RRC消息，例如，RRC重配置消息，也可以为MAC CE消息等。
应理解，该测量放松的内容可以为频率测量放松、小区测量放松、周期测量放松等。具体的，第三指示信息可以包含：需要测量的频率，或者需要测量放松的频率，或者需要测量的小区，或者需要放松测量的小区，或者测量的周期(如周期为秒，分，时等)。换句话说，终端设备进入测量放松状态以后，可以对周期进行测量放松，网络设备可以指示终端设备测量的周期放松，作为示例而非限定，原测量周期为每5分钟测量一次，进入测量放松状态以后，测量周期可以为每10分钟测量一次。终端设备进入测量放松状态以后，可以对某个频率进行测量放松，作为示例而非限定，终端设备可以对该频率不进行测量。 终端设备进入测量放松状态以后，可以对某个小区进行测量放松，作为示例而非限定，终端设备可以对该小区不进行测量。
需要说明的是，终端设备进入测量放松状态的内容也可以为以上三种的组合，作为示例而非限定，网络设备可以指示终端设备对于某个小区A，测量的周期为20分钟一次，对某个小区B，测量的周期为10分钟一次，该测量放松的内容可以由网络设备的第三指示信息进行具体指示，也可以由第三指示信息指示进入测量放松状态而由终端设备侧默认测量放松的内容。该第三指示信息可以为RRC重配消息。
可选的，终端设备使用SSB信号进行测量或使用CSI-RS信号进行测量，收到第三指示信息，对两种类型的参考信号对应的相关测量都可以进行测量放松。可选的，终端设备使用SSB信号进行测量，收到第三指示信息，对SSB信号对应的相关测量进行测量放松。可选的，终端设备使用CSI-RS信号进行测量，收到第三指示信息，对CSI-RS信号对应的相关测量进行测量放松。
在某些实施例中，第三指示信息，可以携带测量ID、测量对象ID等，用于指示对该ID对应的测量对象进行放松。也可以指示对哪种参考信号进行测量放松。
需要说明的是，终端设备在连接态进入测量放松状态后，当满足第一条件后，终端设备需要及时离开测量放松状态，以保证终端设备在连接态的移动性的性能。
本申请实施例以静止准则为例对终端设备离开测量放松状态的第一条件进行说明。应理解，不在小区边缘准则也可以有类似的终端设备判断离开测量放松状态的第一条件，本申请实施例不做赘述，但本申请实施例对此不做限定。
在一种可能的实现方式中，以静止准则为例，该第一条件可以为终端设备判断对第一参考信号类型的参考信号的第一测量值和第一阈值的关系不满足静止准则公式的维持时间达到预设时间第二时间，即在第二时间内第一测量值和第一阈值的关系不满足静止准则的公式，或在第二时间内满足静止准则离开条件的公式。具体的，第二时间取值可以为0。对于静止准则离开条件将在方法400中描述，在此不再赘述。
在一种可能的实现方式中，以静止准则为例，该第一条件可以为终端设备接收到基站发送的指示信息，该指示信息指示终端设备离开测量放松状态。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该第一条件可以为终端设备判断达到基站所预设的测量放松时间。可选的，基站向终端设备发送第三指示信息时，可以携带定时器信息，指示终端设备的测量放松时间，当定时器到期，终端设备结束测量放松状态。
在一种可能的实现方式中，以静止准则为例，该第一条件可以为终端设备复用某些事件的触发条件，例如A3、A4、A5等3GPP协议中定义的测量上报事件的触发条件。下面将对A3、A4、A5等事件做简要介绍。
具体的，A3事件的进入条件A3-1满足公式：
Mn+Ofn+Ocn–Hys>Mp+Ofp+Ocp+Off
A3事件的离开条件A3-2满足公式：
Mn+Ofn+Ocn+Hys<Mp+Ofp+Ocp+Off
其中，Mn为邻区小区测量结果，Ofn为邻区参考信号测量兑现的特定偏置量，Ocn为邻区的小区专用偏置量，Mp为服务小区的测量结果，Ofp为服务小区的测量对象特定偏置量，Ocp为服务小区的小区特定偏置量，Hys为迟滞量，Off为事件的偏置量。
具体的，A4事件的进入条件A4-1满足公式：
Mn+Ofn+Ocn–Hys>Thresh
A4事件的离开条件A4-2满足公式：
Mn+Ofn+Ocn+Hys<Thresh
其中Thresh为该A4事件的阈值。其他定义与上述相同。
具体的，A5事件的进入条件A5-1满足公式：
Mp+Hys<Thresh1，或
Mn+Ofn+Ocn–Hys>Thresh2
A5事件的离开条件A5-2满足公式：
Mp–Hys>Thresh1，或
Mn+Ofn+Ocn+Hys<Thresh2
其中，Thresh1，Thresh2为该事件的阈值，其他定义与上述相同。
需要说明的是，该A3、A4、A5等事件可以为用于切换配置的测量事件，也可以为其他情况适用的测量事件，本申请实施例对此不做限定。
以A3事件为例，当终端设备的测量结果满足A3事件的进入条件定义的公式，则终端设备可以判断离开测量放松状态。可选的，该测量结果可以不满足A3事件中网络设备所配置的触发时间配置(timetotrigger)，即只复用A3事件中的公式条件，不复用A3事件中的触发时间。可选的，终端设备测量结果可以仅满足A3事件的公式条件，在触发时间上可以使用不满足静止准则或者满足静止准则的离开条件的时间，即Tout或第二时间，终端设备测量的小区质量，在第二时间内满足A3事件定义的公式，则可以停止测量放松。可选的，该测量结果也可以满足A3事件中网络设备所配置的时间阈值。
在一种可能的实现方式中，以静止准则为例，该第一条件可以为终端设备触发某些事件上报以后即判断结束测量放松状态。
以A3事件为例，当终端设备触发A3事件上报以后，即默认结束测量放松状态。
应理解，该终端设备可以在达到第一条件后自行结束测量放松状态，该终端设备也可以在达到第一条件后向网络设备发送指示信息，该指示信息指示网络设备该终端设备达到第一条件。网络设备收到该指示信息后，可以决定是否指示终端设备结束测量放松状态，当终端设备接收到网络设备结束测量放松状态的指示后，终端设备结束测量放松状态。
本申请实施例提供的技术方案，在终端设备进入连接态时，可以指示终端设备第一参考信号的类型，使得终端设备可以基于指示对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量，获取第一测量值，并判断第一测量值和第一阈值的关系是否满足第一准则，终端设备将判断结果上报给网络设备，网络设备根据该结果指示终端设备是否进入测量放松状态，当进入测量放松状态时，可以节省连接态终端设备的功耗。
图3是本申请实施例的通信方法的又一例。如图3所示，该方法300包括：
S310，网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示第一参考信号类型。
具体的，该第一参考信号类型可以包括同步信号块(Synchronization SignalBlock，SSB)，信道状态信息参考信号(Channel State Information-Reference Signal，CSI-RS)。需要说明的是，当终端设备处于空闲态或非激活态时，终端设备可以被配置SSB信号，当终端设 备处于连接态时，终端设备可以被配置SSB信号和/或CSI-RS信号。
需要说明的是，在空闲态或非激活态时，终端设备对SSB信号进行测量，在连接态时，终端设备可以对SSB信号进行测量，终端设备也可以对CSI-RS信号进行测量。
具体的，该第一指示信息可以用于指示终端设备需要对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行第一判定，该第一判定为终端设备需要判定第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系是否满足第一准则。
在某些实施例中，该终端设备在连接态时，网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息可以是通过广播消息发送，也可以是通过专用信令发送，例如，无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control，RRC)重配置消息，或者，媒体接入控制(Medium Access Control,MAC)控制元素(Control Element，CE)MAC CE等，本申请实施例对此不做限定。该第一指示信息用于指示终端设备对SSB信号进行测量，或对CSI-RS信号进行测量，或对其他可能的类型的参考信号进行测量，需要说明的是，该测量用于进行第一判定。
在某些实施例中，该终端设备在连接态时，终端设备收到的测量配置信息中全部都是指示终端设备使用SSB信号进行测量或上报时，终端设备未收到该第一指示信息但默认使用SSB信号进行用于第一判定的测量，或者，该终端设备在连接态时，终端设备收到的测量配置信息中全部都是指示终端设备使用CSI-RS信号进行测量或者上报时，终端设备未收到第一指示信息但默认使用CSI-RS信号进行用于第一判定的测量。需要说明的是，该测量配置信息中配置了其他方面的测量需求。
在某些实施例中，该终端设备在连接态时，默认使用SSB信号进行用于第一判定的测量，不需要网络设备发送第一指示信息进行第一参考信号类型的指示。
在某些实施例中，该终端设备在空闲态或者非激活态时，网络设备向终端设备广播第一指示信息，可选的，该第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型为SSB信号，可选的，该第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS信号。对应的，当终端设备由空闲态或者非激活态进入连接态时，可以根据空闲态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型继续进行测量。
需要说明的是，在本申请实施例中，终端设备侧协议进行了适应性修改，使得终端设备收到该第一指示信息即进行第一判定的测量和判定，而不需要专门的测量配置信息进行配置。
应理解，该第一指示信息还可以用于指示第一阈值，或者，偏置量信息，需要说明的是，若第一指示信息用于指示偏置量信息，则可能终端设备在空闲态或非激活态已经收到过一次阈值信息，终端设备在该阈值信息的基础上结合偏置量信息用于后续的判断。可选的，该第一阈值可以为终端设备进入连接态时重新配置的第一阈值，可选的，该第一阈值可以为终端设备在空闲态时的阈值。
在一种可能的实现方式中，当终端设备在连接态时，网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息指示第一阈值，或者，该第一指示信息指示第一阈值的偏置量，该第一阈值，或该第一偏置量是SSB信号相关的第一阈值或偏置量，则终端设备默认对SSB信号进行用于第一判定的测量，若该第一阈值，或该第一阈值的偏置量是CSI-RS相关的第一阈值或偏置量，则终端设备默认对CSI-RS信号进行用于第一判定的测量。在该实现方式中，可以不需要单独指示第一信号类型。
S320，终端设备在连接态时根据第一指示信息对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量，获取第一测量值。
具体的，终端设备接收第一指示信息，确定用于进行第一判定的第一参考信号类型，终端设备对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量。
终端设备可以对服务小区进行至少n次测量，该n大于或等于1。
终端设备可以对服务小区的至少m个邻区进行测量，该m大于或等于1。
S330，终端设备根据第一测量值和第一阈值确定第一判定的结果。
具体的，终端设备对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量，获取第一测量值，终端设备判定该第一测量值和第一阈值的关系是否满足第一准则，该第一准则可以包括静止准则，不在小区边缘准则。需要说明的是，该静止准则和不在小区边缘准则可以从一定程度上评估终端设备的大概位置和移动性信息。
需要说明的是，第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足第一准则需要满足的关系式可以参见方法200中步骤S210的描述，在此不做赘述。
网络设备网络设备S340，终端设备向网络设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一判定的结果。
在某些实施例中，终端设备判定第一测量量和第一阈值的关系满足第一准则，终端设备向网络设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一测量量和第一阈值的关系满足第一准则，可选的，终端设备可以对服务小区进行n次测量，并上报其中的满足第一准则的测量结果，该n次测量可以按照测量的时间进行排序，可选的，该终端设备也可以对m个邻区进行测量，并上报其中的满足第一准则的测量结果。
在某些实施例中，终端设备判定第一测量量和第一阈值的关系不满足第一准则，终端设备向网络设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一测量量和第一阈值的关系不满足第一准则，可选的，终端设备可以对服务小区进行n次测量，并上报其中的不满足第一准则的测量结果，该n次测量可以按照测量的时间进行排序，可选的，该终端设备也可以对m个邻区进行测量，并上报其中的不满足第一准则的测量结果,其中m,n为正整数。
在某些实施例中，终端设备判定第一测量量和第一阈值的关系是否满足第一准则，终端设备向网络设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一测量量和第一阈值的关系是否满足第一准则，可选的，终端设备可以对服务小区进行n次测量，并上报该n次测量结果，可选的，该终端设备也可以对多个邻区进行测量，并上报该小区质量最好的m个邻区的测量结果是否满足第一准则,其中m,n为正整数。
需要说明的是，该第二指示信息可以通过终端设备辅助信息消息来发送给网络设备，也可以通过MAC CE信息发送给网络设备。
需要说明的是，终端设备向网络设备发送第二指示信息以后，没有收到网络设备发送的第三指示信息，则终端设备可以等待第一时间以后再次发送第二指示信息，该第一时间可以是网络设备之前向终端设备发送的，也可以是终端设备默认的或预配置的或协议规定的。可选的，终端设备也可以进行L次上报以后，依然没有收到网络设备的第三指示信息后，则停止向网络设备发送第二指示信息，该L的大小可以为网络设备之前向终端设备发送的，也可以为终端设备默认的，终端设备停止发送第二指示信息以后，若再次收到第一指示信息，则终端设备再次进行测量并根据判断结果发送第二指示信息。
可选的，终端设备上报指示信息之前，网络设备可以向终端设备配置满足第一准则后上报的最大次数L，当终端设备满足第一准则后，开始向网络设备发送第二指示信息，发送周期为网络设备配置的或终端设备默认的配置。具体的，若在发送配置过程中收到放松指示信息，则终端设备停止发送第二指示信息，并开始测量放松。终端设备上报的L次测量结果可以均是满足第一准则的，也可能出现不满足的情况。
可选的，终端设备向网络设备发送第二指示信息以后，没有收到网络设备发送的第三指示信息，则终端设备可以启动定时器，当定时器超时后，再次判断是否满足第一准则，若满足则再次发送第二指示信息，若不满足则不需要发送。该定时器可以是网络设备之前向终端设备发送的，也可以是协议规定的。
可选的，终端设备判断满足第一准则后，可以自行决定是否进行测量放松，而不需要通知网络设备。或者自行决定是否进行测量放松后，再向网络设备发送第二指示信息，以及是否已经进行测量放松。
S350，网络设备向终端设备发送第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示终端设备进入测量放松状态。
需要说明的是，该步骤为可选的，若网络设备根据第二指示信息判定终端设备不能进入测量放松状态，则网络设备可以不向终端设备发送第三指示信息。
具体的，网络设备接收第二指示信息，可选的，网络设备根据第二指示信息中对服务小区的测量结果对终端设备的大概位置以及移动性信息进行评估，可选的，网络设备根据第二指示信息中对邻区的测量结果，判断终端设备是否可能会发生切换。
具体的，网络设备根据第二指示信息确定终端设备可以进行测量放松时，向终端设备发送第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示终端设备进入测量放松状态。该第三指示信息可以为RRC消息，例如，RRC重配置消息，也可以为MAC CE消息等。
应理解，该测量放松的内容可以为频率测量放松、小区测量放松、周期测量放松等。换句话说，终端设备进入测量放松状态以后，可以对周期进行测量放松，网络设备可以指示终端设备测量的周期放松，作为示例而非限定，原测量周期为每5分钟测量一次，进入测量放松状态以后，测量周期可以为每10分钟测量一次。终端设备进入测量放松状态以后，可以对某个频率进行测量放松，作为示例而非限定，终端设备可以对该频率不进行测量。终端设备进入测量放松状态以后，可以对某个小区进行测量放松，作为示例而非限定，终端设备可以对该小区不进行测量。
需要说明的是，终端设备进入测量放松状态的内容也可以为以上三种的组合，作为示例而非限定，网络设备可以指示终端设备对于某个小区A，测量的周期为20分钟一次，对某个小区B，测量的周期为10分钟一次，该测量放松的内容可以由网络设备的第三指示信息进行具体指示，也可以由第三指示信息指示进入测量放松状态而由终端设备侧默认测量放松的内容。
可选的，终端设备使用SSB信号进行测量或使用CSI-RS信号进行测量，收到第三指示信息，对两种类型的参考信号对应的相关测量都可以进行测量放松。可选的，终端设备使用SSB信号进行测量，收到第三指示信息，对SSB信号对应的相关测量进行测量放松。可选的，终端设备使用CSI-RS信号进行测量，收到第三指示信息，对CSI-RS信号对应的相关测量进行测量放松。
可选的，第三指示消息可以仅为测量配置信息，即通过实现减少了需要测量的测量对象或者小区或者频点。
应理解，网络设备发送第三指示信息指示对周期进行测量放松可以具体以网络设备向终端设备发送参考信号测量配置的形式进行指示。
具体的，网络设备可以向终端设备发送两套SMTC(SS/PBCH block measurement timing configuration，SSB测量定时配置)配置，即第一SMTC配置和第二SMTC配置。其中，第一SMTC配置可以用于终端设备不进入测量放松状态时使用，第二SMTC配置可以用于终端设备进入测量放松状态时使用。第一SMTC配置和第二SMTC配置可以在同一消息配置，也可以在不同消息配置。可选的，该消息可以为RRC重配消息。
应理解，该SMTC配置用于指示终端设备测量SSB信号的时机，具体的，该SMTC配置中包括测量周期和偏移量。需要说明的是，该偏移量信息用于指示该SMTC在测量周期的起始位置，例如，该SMTC测量周期从哪一个时隙，或子帧，或符号等开始。可选的，第二SMTC配置指示的测量周期可以比第一SMTC配置指示的测量周期长，使得终端设备在测量放松状态时能够节省功耗。
可选的，在该SMTC配置中可以携带SMTC ID，用于表示SMTC配置为第一SMTC配置或第二SMTC配置。
可选的，第二SMTC配置可以通过专用字段来指示，若该字段存在，则终端设备被配置了满足第一准则的测量放松使用的配置信息，该字段可以在测量配置的测量对象配置中。
需要说明的是，该第二SMTC配置可以在终端设备未满足第一准则时，与第一准则的配置消息同步配置；该第二SMTC配置可以在终端设备满足第一准则时再进行配置。可选的，当终端设备满足第一准则时，网络设备可以向终端设备发送指示信息，该指示信息指示终端设备使用第二SMTC配置进行测量。应理解，该指示信息可以等效为上述第三指示信息，即网络设备向终端设备发送使用第二SMTC配置进行测量则隐式指示终端设备进入测量放松状态，并使用第二SMTC配置进行测量。若在此之前没有给终端设备配置第二SMTC配置，则第二SMTC配置可以包括在该指示信息中，若有，则收到该指示信息后，终端设备使用第二SMTC配置进行放松测量。
应理解，网络设备指示终端设备进入测量放松状态后测量内容的改变可以以SMTC配置的改变的形式体现，即网络设备在终端设备进入测量放松状态后给终端设备配置不同的SMTC配置。
可选的，网络设备也可以只给终端设备配置第一SMTC配置，当终端设备进入测量放松状态后，网络设备可以发送一条指示信息，指示终端设备该第一SMTC配置中的测量周期改变，例如，网络设备可以指示终端设备该第一SMTC配置中的测量周期设置为原来的x倍，或者，在协议中默认当终端设备处于测量放松状态下，使用的周期为不在测量放松状态时的x倍，当终端设备进入测量放松状态或者收到第三指示信息后，则应用测量放松状态对应的周期进行测量，在某些实施例中，该x可以等于2。需要说明的是，测量放松的对象可以是对服务小区的，也可以是对邻区的。
类似的，网络设备也可以给CSI-RS信号配置类似的配置信息。
具体的，网络设备向终端设备发送用于配置CSI-RS资源的CSI-RS配置信息，该CSI-RS配置信息中包括小区标识、频域配置等信息，还包括至少一个CSI-RS的资源配置 集合。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该CSI-RS的资源配置集合中的每个CSI-RS的资源配置包括CSI-RS索引、周期以及偏移量等配置。与上述SMTC资源配置类似，该CSI-RS的资源配置集合中可以包括第一CSI-RS配置和第二CSI-RS配置，其中，第一CSI-RS配置用于终端设备不在测量放松状态时使用，第二CSI-RS配置用于终端设备在测量放松状态时使用。需要说明的是，协议预定义在A字段配置第一CSI-RS配置，在B字段配置第二CSI-RS配置。则终端设备默认A字段的配置为第一CSI-RS配置，B字段的配置为CSI-RS配置。网络设备可以在终端设备未进入测量放松状态时同时配置该第一CSI-RS配置和第二CSI-RS配置，网络设备也可以在终端设备未进入测量放松状态时先配置第一CSI-RS配置，在终端设备进入测量放松状态时再配置第二CSI-RS，或者，网络设备可以在终端设备未进入测量放松状态时先配置第一CSI-RS配置，在终端设备进入测量放松状态时指示将第一CSI-RS配置中的周期变为原来的x倍等，如X＝2，具体描述可以参见对于SMTC的配置，在此不做赘述。
S360，终端设备结束测量放松状态。
可选的，终端设备在测量放松状态时，发现测量量和第一阈值的关系不满足第一准则，可以向网络设备发送第四指示信息，具体的，该第四指示信息可以指示测量量和第一阈值的关系不满足第一准则，该测量量可以为第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型对应的测量量，也可以为终端设备自己随机测量的类型的参考信号的测量量，本申请对此不做限定。可选的，终端设备发送第四指示信息可以自己决定结束测量放松状态，即可以在判定不满足第一准则时，即可以结束测量放松。可以在发第四消息之前，也可以之后。也可以等待网络设备的第五指示信息，该第五指示信息用于指示终端设备结束测量放松状态。
可选的，终端也可以通知终端采用的测量放松的方法。
可选的，步骤S350中，网络设备发送的第三指示信息中可以包括定时器的配置，该定时器的配置也可以为终端默认的，终端设备收到第三指示信息以后，进入测量放松状态的同时启动该定时器，当定时器达到第一时长以后，终端设备结束测量放松状态。需要说明的是，若在第一时长内，终端设备发现测量量和第一阈值的关系不满足第一准则，可以向网络设备发送第四指示信息，自行决定结束测量放松状态或等待网络设备的第五指示信息结束测量放松状态。
可选的，在步骤S350中，网络设备发送的第三指示信息中可以包括定时器配置，该定时器的配置也可以为终端默认的。终端设备收到第三指示信息以后，进入测量放松状态的同时启动该定时器，在该定时器达到第一时长之前，终端设备发现测量量和第一阈值的关系不满足第一准则，也不向网络设备发送第四指示信息，当该定时器达到第一时长，终端设备向网络设备发送第四指示信息，自行决定结束测量放松状态或等待网络设备的第五指示信息结束测量放松状态。
需要说明的是，在网络设备侧，在终端设备测量放松状态期间，网络设备收到第四指示信息，或者，网络设备判断负载均衡时，或者，根据终端设备上报的测量结果，判定终端设备不需要进行测量放松时，可以向终端设备发送第五指示信息，指示终端设备结束测量放松状态。该第五指示信息可以为专用的RRC消息，也可以为MAC CE消息等。
需要说明的是，终端设备可以根据第一条件判断是否结束测量放松状态，关于第一条 件的描述可以参考方法200，在此不再赘述。
需要说明的是，参考步骤S350，若网络设备给终端设备配置了SMTC配置，可选的，终端设备在判断不满足第一准则时，可以自行选择时间点由第二SMTC配置切换到第一SMTC配置进行测量，不需要网络设备的指示。可选的，终端设备在判断不满足第一准则时，可以向网络设备发送上述第四指示信息，终端设备在收到网络设备的第五指示信息后，根据网络设备的第五指示信息，即网络设备指示终端设备结束测量放松状态后，终端设备则默认由第二SMTC配置切换到第一SMTC配置进行测量。可选的，终端设备在判断不满足第一准则时，可以向网络设备发送上述第四指示信息，终端设备收到网络设备的第六指示信息后，则由第二SMTC配置切换到第一SMTC配置进行测量，具体的，该第六指示信息指示终端设备由第二SMTC配置切换到第一SMTC配置进行测量。或者在第六指示信息中携带停止放松测量的SMTC配置。
本申请实施例提供的技术方案，在终端设备进入连接态时，可以指示终端设备第一参考信号的类型，使得终端设备可以基于指示对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量，获取第一测量值，并判断第一测量值和第一阈值的关系是否满足第一准则，终端设备将判断结果上报给网络设备，网络设备根据该结果指示终端设备是否进入测量放松状态，当进入测量放松状态时，可以节省连接态终端设备的功耗。以及，当不满足第一准则后，及时停止测量放松，确保终端在连接态正常工作。
图4是本申请实施例的通信方法的另一例。如图4所示，该方法400包括：
S410，网络设备向终端设备发送测量配置信息。
具体的，该测量配置信息中测量对象列表，上报配置列表等。其中，每个测量对象都对应一个测量标识，每个上报配置都对应一个测量上报标识，每个测量标识关联一个测量对象标识和一个测量上报标识。终端设备可以根据收到的测量标识，确定对应的测量对象和上报配置。
应理解，在测量对象列表中的每个测量对象中，配置了频率信息，小区信息，参考信号信息等中的至少一项。
在本申请实施例中，在上报配置列表中，定义了新的事件，该事件所指示的内容可以与方法300中第一指示信息指示的内容类似，该事件可以为：第一准则判断事件，具体包括：静止准则判断事件、不在小区边缘判断事件等。该配置可以为进入第一准则事件则上报，也可以为离开第一准则事件则上报，也可以定义为进入或离开第一准则事件都进行上报。可以定义静止准则事件对应的为第一事件，可以定义不在小区边缘准则事件对应为第二事件。网络设备在该事件配置中，指示终端设备基于事件触发上报，或者周期性上报，也就是说，例如，当配置基于事件触发上报时，终端设备进入第一事件或第二事件，则向网络设备上报，或，终端设备离开第一事件或第二事件，则向网络设备上报，或终端设备进入或离开第一事件或第二事件都上报。当配置周期性上报时，例如，终端设备周期性的向网络设备上报进入第一事件或离开第一事件，或者，终端设备周期性的向网络设备上报进入第二事件或离开第二事件。即上报配置中包含触发上报的第一事件或第二事件，以及对应事件的阈值、指示离开时间是否触发上报、迟滞量、触发时间、是否使用白名单小区中、参考信号类型、指示是否上报服务小区质量、是否上报邻区质量以及上报的测量报告最大数等至少一项。
具体的，以静止准则为例，可以将静止准则定义为一个事件，并在该事件中，定义进入准则和离开准则，该进入准则可以为满足静止准则，该离开准则可以为不满足静止准则。网络设备可以在发送给终端设备的上报配置中，增加一个指示信息，该指示信息指示终端设备当满足离开准则时则进行上报。可选的，也可以增加另一个指示信息，该指示信息指示终端设备当满足进入准则时则进行上报。
具体的，以静止准则为例，可以将静止准则定义为两个事件，其中，进入静止准则为一个事件，离开静止准则为另一个事件。可选的，当终端设备满足进入静止准则时进行上报。可选的，当终端设备满足离开静止准则时也进行上报。
该配置信息为进入第一事件则上报时，终端设备判断满足以下公式则上报：
当第一参考信号类型为SSB，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为SSB：
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)<S SearchDeltaP，其中，S SearchDeltaP是与SSB信号相对应的第一阈值，Srxlev为当前服务小区的参考信号接收功率(Reference Signal Receiving Power，RSRP)质量，即第一测量值，Srxlev Ref为当前服务小区的参考RSRP质量。
可选的，当终端设备测得的第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足上述公式的维持时间大于或等于预设时间第一时间后，终端设备判断SSB信号的第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足静止准则，即满足进入第一事件。
需要说明的是，该预设时间第一时间可以为基站向终端设备配置的满足静止准则的维持时间，该第一时间的具体名称可以为TSearchDeltaP，也可以为Tin，本申请实施例对该第一时间的具体名称不做限定。
需要说明的是，基站也可以向终端设备配置不满足静止准则的维持时间第二时间，用于终端设备判断是否离开测量放松状态，该第二时间的具体名称可以为Tout，本申请对该第二时间的具体名称不做限定。
需要说明的是，该满足静止准则的维持时间第一时间和不满足静止准则的维持时间第二时间可以通过RRC消息进行配置，也可以通过测量配置中的报告配置进行配置。
可选的，若终端设备测得的第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足静止准则的维持时间达不到第一时间，终端设备则将驻留小区或者服务小区的Srxlev设置为Srxlev Ref。可选的，若在第三时间内终端设备测得的第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足静止准则的维持时间达不到第一时间，终端设备则将驻留小区或者服务小区的Srxlev设置为Srxlev Ref。可选的，该第三时间是基站向终端设备指示的。可选的，该第三时间是终端设备默认的。。
当第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为CSI-RS：
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)<S SearchDeltaPCSI，或者，
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)<S SearchDeltaP+offset CSI，其中，S SearchDeltaPCSI为在连接态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一阈值，SSearchDelt aP为空闲态或非激活态时收到的阈值，在某些实施例中，该阈值为SSB信号的阈值，offsetCSI为在连接态时收到的偏置量。
该配置信息为离开第一事件则上报时，终端设备判断满足以下公式则上报：
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)>S SearchDeltaP，其中，S SearchDeltaP是与SSB信号相对应的第一阈值，Srxlev为当前服务小区的参考信号接收功率(Reference Signal Receiving Power，RSRP)质量，即第一测量值，Srxlev Ref为当前服务小区的参考RSRP质量。
当第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为CSI-RS：
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)>S SearchDeltaPCSI，或者，
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)>S SearchDeltaP+offset CSI，其中，S SearchDeltaPCSI为在连接态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一阈值，S SearchDeltaP为空闲态或非激活态时收到的阈值，在某些实施例中，该阈值为SSB信号的阈值，offset CSI为在连接态时收到的偏置量。
该配置信息为进入第二事件则上报时，终端设备判断满足以下公式则上报：
当第一参考信号类型为SSB，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为SSB：
Srxlev>S searchThresholdP且，
Squal>S SearchThresholdQ,如果配置了S SearchThresholdQ。其中，S searchThresholdP为第一阈值，
S SearchThresholdQ也为第一阈值，Srxlev为当前服务小区的RSRP质量，Squal为当前服务小
区的参考RSRQ质量。
当第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为CSI-RS：
Srxlev>S SearchThresholdP+offset CSI,且，
Squal>S SearchThresholdQ+offset CSI，如果配置了S SearchThresholdQ，
或者，
Srxlev>S SearchThresholdPCSI,且,
Squal>S SearchThresholdQCSI,如果配置了S SearchThresholdQCSI。其中，S SearchThresholdP和S SearchThresholdQ为空闲态或非激活态时收到的阈值，在某些实施例中，该阈值为SSB信号的阈值，offset CSI为在连接态时收到的偏置量，S SearchDeltaPCSI、S SearchThresholdQCSI为在连接态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一阈值。
该配置信息为离开第二事件则上报时，终端设备判断满足以下公式则上报：
当第一参考信号类型为SSB，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为SSB：
Srxlev<S searchThresholdP且，
Squal<S SearchThresholdQ,如果配置了S SearchThresholdQ。其中，S searchThresholdP为第一阈值，
S SearchThresholdQ也为第一阈值，Srxlev为当前服务小区的RSRP质量，Squal为当前服务小
区的参考RSRQ质量。
当第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为CSI-RS：
Srxlev<S SearchThresholdP+offset CSI,且，
Squal<S SearchThresholdQ+offset CSI，如果配置了S SearchThresholdQ，
或者，
Srxlev<S SearchThresholdPCSI,且,
Squal<S SearchThresholdQCSI,如果配置了S SearchThresholdQCSI。其中，S SearchThresholdP和S SearchThresholdQ为空闲态或非激活态时收到的阈值，在某些实施例中，该阈值为SSB信号的阈值，offset CSI为在连接态时收到的偏置量，S SearchDeltaPCSI、S SearchThresholdQCSI为在连接态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一阈值。
需要说明的是，在该事件的配置中，可以包括第一参考信息类型的配置，用于指示使用哪种参考信号，该第一参考信号类型包括：SSB，CSI-RS，关于该第一参考信号类型的描述具体可参见方法300。也可以为默认，从该配置信息的事件定义中默认该第一参考信号的类型。
需要说明的是，在该事件的配置中，可以指示上报邻区的测量结果，也可以指示上报服务小区的测量结果，具体可参见方法300。
需要说明的是，在网络设备向终端设备发送测量配置信息之前，终端设备可以在于网络设备建立RRC连接之后，向网络设备指示终端设备的能力信息，该能力信息可以包括窄带终端能力，和/或，支持连接态测量放松的能力等，本申请对此不做特别限定。
S420，终端设备根据测量配置信息进行测量。
终端设备根据测量配置信息中的第一参考信号类型对邻区或者服务小区的参考信号进行测量。
S430，终端设备进行测量上报。
具体的，终端设备根据测量结果判断是否满足事件的触发条件，该触发条件可以为进入或离开第一事件，或进入或离开第二事件，根据上报配置中的配置向网络设备发送测量上报消息，用于指示该终端设备满足进入或离开第一事件或者第二事件。
终端设备向网络设备发送测量结果，结果中包含服务小区的质量和/邻区的质量，其中服务小区的质量可以为至少一次测量结果，邻区质量为至少一个邻区的测量结果。
具体的，以静止准则为例，与步骤S410所述相对应，当将静止准则作为一个事件，并在该事件内，定义了进入准则和离开准则。终端设备收到该配置信息，若终端设备满足了进入准则或离开准则后，则触发测量报告的上报。需要说明的是，在发送测量报告时，也需要携带一个指示信息，该指示信息用于指示进入准则或离开准则，即需要指示上报的原因。
在某些实施例中，终端向网络设备发送的测量报告消息中携带一个指示信息，用于指示该测量报告没有其他的测量结果，比如同频邻区，异频邻区的测量结果，或者没有任何小区的测量结果。
S440，网络设备向终端设备发送第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示终端设备进入测量放松状态。
具体的，若网络设备根据终端设备发送的测量上报消息，判断该终端设备满足进入第一或者第二事件，则向终端发送第三指示消息，该指示信息可以包括在重新发送的测量配置信息中，可选的，其体现形式可以为在测量配置信息中包含待测量的频率信息或小区列表信息，上述信息与终端设备之前收到的测量配置信息相比，待测量的频率和小区数目更少，使得终端设备可以测量更少的频率，或，更少的小区数目等，即相当于进入测量放松状态。可选的，其体现形式可以为在测量配置信息中，在带测量的频点信息或小区信息中，添加指示字段，用于指示终端设备对该频率或者该小区需要进行测量放松，或者在测量对象配置中添加该字段，标识对应的测量对象需要进行放松；或者添加放松测量字段，用于指示某一测量标识对应的测量对象进行测量放松。可选的，其体现形式可以为测量配置信息中，具体指示终端设备测量放松的内容，该内容可以参见方法300中S350的相关描述。第三指示信息可以是承载在RRC重配消息中。具体的第三指示信息可以指示测量放松的 方式，比如测量的周期，或者不测量指示等。
需要说明的是，网络设备也可以不依赖上述流程，直接向终端设备发送开始或者停止测量放松的指示。
可选的，该指示信息也可以以一条单独的信息发送，指示终端设备具体的测量放松的内容，具体描述可以参见方法300中步骤S350的相关描述。
S450，终端设备结束测量放松状态。
在本申请实施例中，终端设备测量放松状态测量后发现满足离开第一事件或离开第二事件，可以向网络设备上报离开第一事件或第二事件，也可以单独向网络设备发送指示信息，指示离开第一事件或第二事件。终端设备可以自行决定停止放松并向网络设备发送测量上报消息，用于通知网络设备该终端设备离开第一或第二事件。
可选的，也可以收到网络设备发送的停止测量放松后，在停止进行测量放松。网络设备发送的停止测量放松指示可以包含在RRC重配置，也可以是在MAC CE中。可以针对某一小区或者频率或者某一测量对象或者某一测量标识等进行指示停止测量放松。
具体的，终端设备也可以根据是否满足第一条件判断是否离开测量放松状态。关于该第一条件的具体描述可以参考方法200，在此不再赘述。
该步骤的其他相关描述可以参见方法300中步骤S360的相关描述。
本申请实施例提供的技术方案，在终端设备进入连接态时，可以在测量配置信息中添加新的测量上报事件，指示终端设备第一参考信号的类型，使得终端设备可以基于指示对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量，获取第一测量值，并判断第一测量值和第一阈值的关系是否满足第一准则，终端设备将判断结果通过测量上报信息上报给网络设备，网络设备根据该结果指示终端设备是否进入测量放松状态，当进入测量放松状态时，可以节省连接态终端设备的功耗。通过测量上报过程进行上报，实现连接态测量放松流程。
图5是本申请实施例的通信方法的再一例。如图5所示，该方法500包括：
S510，集中式单元(Centralized Unit，CU)向分布式单元(Distributed Unit，DU)发送第一信息，该第一信息用于指示禁止终端设备接入第一小区。
终端设备可以有两种不同能力的终端，包括：一个接收分支(1R)终端设备，两个接收分支(2R)接收设备，对于低能力的1R或2R终端设备，需要消耗较多的无线资源，因此网络侧会在负载较大的情况下，对低能力终端进行接入控制，限制该类终端设备的应用。
具体的，在CU-DU架构中，当CU确定对终端设备进行接入控制时，CU向DU发送第一信息，第一信息指示禁止1R或2R终端设备接入第一小区。具体的，该第一信息用于指示终端设备在执行小区选择或者小区重选时选到该第一小区。
S520，DU向终端设备发送系统消息，该系统消息中包括第一信息。
具体的，DU接收CU发送的第一消息，可选的，DU可以直接将该第一消息的内容包括在系统消息中，发送给终端设备，可选的，DU可以接收该第一消息，重新生成一个指示信息包括在系统消息中，发送给终端设备。
S530，终端设备接收第一信息，根据第一信息确定第一小区禁止接入。
具体的，终端设备接收系统消息中的第一消息，终端设备根据自身的1R或2R能力，确定第一小区不能接入，进一步的，终端设备根据第一信息执行同频或者异频的小区重选。
图6是本申请实施例的通信装置600示意图，该通信装置600中的各个单元可以通过软件来实现。
在一些实施例中，该通信装置600可以是上文方法实施例200中的终端设备，也可以是用于实现上文方法实施例中终端设备的功能的芯片。应理解，该通信装置600可以对应于本申请实施例的方法200中的终端设备对应的步骤。该通信装置600包括：
收发单元610，用于接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息。
处理单元620，用于在连接态下根据第一指示信息对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量，以获取第一测量值。
具体的，该第一指示信息用于指示第一参考信号类型。进一步的，该第一指示信息用于指示处理单元620对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行第一判定，第一判定用于判定第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系是否满足第一准则。可选的，该第一指示信息还用于指示第一阈值，或者，偏置量信息。需要说明的是，若第一指示信息用于指示偏置量信息，则可能收发单元610在空闲态或非激活态已经收到过一次阈值信息，处理单元620在该阈值信息的基础上结合偏置量信息用于后续的判断。可选的，该第一阈值可以为通信装置进入连接态时重新配置的第一阈值，可选的，该第一阈值可以为通信装置在空闲态时的阈值，处理单元620默认使用该空闲态时的阈值继续用于判断。
具体的，该第一参考信号类型可以包括同步信号块(Synchronization Signal Block，SSB)，信道状态信息参考信号(Channel State Information-Reference Signal，CSI-RS)。需要说明的是，当通信装置处于空闲态或非激活态时，终端设备可以被配置SSB信号，当通信装置处于连接态时，处理单元620可以被配置SSB信号和/或CSI-RS信号。
需要说明的是，在空闲态或非激活态时，处理单元620对SSB信号进行测量，在连接态时，处理单元620可以对SSB信号进行测量，处理单元620也可以对CSI-RS信号进行测量。
在某些实施例中，当通信装置处于连接态时，该第一指示信息可以通过广播或专用信令单独发送，该专用信令可以为无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control，RRC)重配置消息，或媒体接入控制(Medium Access Control,MAC)控制元素(Control Element，CE)MAC CE等消息，本申请实施例对此不做特别限定。
在某些实施例中，当通信装置处于连接态时，该第一指示信息可以包括在测量配置信息或者上报配置中，该第一指示信息指示的内容可以以基于事件触发上报或者周期性上报的事件被定义在上报列表中。该第一指示信息也可以承载在RRC重配置消息中。
在某些实施例中，该第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型可以为隐式的指示，例如，该通信装置在连接态时，收发单元610收到的测量配置信息中全部都是指示处理单元620使用SSB信号进行测量或上报时，收发单元610未收到该第一指示信息但默认使用SSB信号进行用于第一判定的测量，或者，该通信装置在连接态时，收发单元610收到的测量配置信息中全部都是指示处理单元620使用CSI-RS信号进行测量或者上报时，收发单元610未收到第一指示信息但处理单元620默认使用CSI-RS信号进行用于第一判定的测量。需要说明的是，该测量配置信息中配置了其他方面的测量需求。再例如，该通信装置在连接态时，默认使用SSB信号进行用于第一判定的测量，不需要网络设备发送第一指示信息进行第一参考信号类型的指示。需要说明的是，若接收到第一指示信息，则不采用默认 的SSB信号进行第一判定的测量，对应的，根据第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型对该类型的参考信号进行第一判定的测量。再例如，该通信装置在空闲态或者非激活态时，网络设备向收发单元610广播第一指示信息，可选的，该第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型为SSB信号，可选的，该第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS信号。对应的，当通信装置由空闲态或者非激活态进入连接态时，可以根据空闲态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型继续进行测量。
具体的，该第一准则可以包括静止准则，不在小区边缘准则。需要说明的是，该静止准则和不在小区边缘准则可以从一定程度上评估通信装置的大概位置和移动性信息。
具体的，该第一测量值和第一阈值(或第一阈值的偏置量)的关系满足静止准则，则第一参考信号类型的参考信号的第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足下列关系：
对于第一参考信号类型为SSB信号：
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)<S SearchDeltaP，其中，S SearchDeltaP是与SSB信号相对应的第一阈值，Srxlev为当前服务小区的参考信号接收功率(Reference Signal Receiving Power，RSRP)质量，即第一测量值，Srxlev Ref为当前服务小区的参考RSRP质量。
对于第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS信号：
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)<S SearchDeltaPCSI，或者，
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)<S SearchDeltaP+offset CSI，其中，S SearchDeltaPCSI为在连接态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一阈值，S SearchDeltaP为空闲态或非激活态时收到的阈值，在某些实施例中，该阈值为SSB信号的阈值，offset CSI为在连接态时收到的偏置量。具体的，阈值与偏置量的名称在本申请实施例指标是一种名称的示例，也可以使用其他名称，本申请实施例对此不做限定。
具体的，该第一测量值和第一阈值(或第一阈值的偏置量)的关系满足不在小区边缘准则，则第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足下列关系：
对于第一参考信号类型为SSB信号：
Srxlev>S searchThresholdP且，
Squal>S SearchThresholdQ,如果配置了S SearchThresholdQ。其中，S searchThresholdP为第一阈值，
S SearchThresholdQ也为第一阈值，Srxlev为当前服务小区的RSRP质量，Squal为当前服务小
区的参考RSRQ质量。
对于第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS信号：
Srxlev>S SearchThresholdP+offset CSI,且，
Squal>S SearchThresholdQ+offset CSI，如果配置了S SearchThresholdQ，
或者，
Srxlev>S SearchThresholdPCSI,且,
Squal>S SearchThresholdQCSI,如果配置了S SearchThresholdQCSI。其中，S SearchThresholdP和S SearchThresholdQ为空闲态或非激活态时收到的阈值，在某些实施例中，该阈值为SSB信号的阈值，offset CSI为在连接态时收到的偏置量，S SearchDeltaPCSI、S SearchThresholdQCSI为在连接态时收 到的第一指示信息指示的第一阈值。
需要说明的是，在某些实施例中，该通信装置在空闲态时根据广播的SSB信号的阈值进行第一判定，当通信装置由空闲态进入连接态时，网络设备可以指示处理单元620测量的参考信号的类型为SSB信号或CSI-RS信号，当指示测量的信号为SSB信号时，可以延用空闲态时的SSB信号的阈值，也可以重新指示SSB信号的第一阈值，当指示测量的信号为CSI-RS信号时，可以在空闲态的SSB信号的阈值的基础上，指示偏置量，也可以重新指示CSI-RS信号的第一阈值，本申请对此不做特别的限定。
需要说明的是，在某些情况下，网络设备也可以指示该处理单元620测量是否满足其他准则，本申请对此不做限定。可选的，该其他准则可以辅助网络设备判断是否使该通信设备进入测量放松状态。
具体的，收发单元610接收第一指示信息，确定用于进行第一判定的第一参考信号类型，处理单元620对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量。
处理单元620可以对服务小区进行n次测量，该n次测量可以按照测量的时间进行排列，该n大于或等于1。
处理单元620可以对服务小区的m个邻区进行测量，该m大于或等于1。
该收发单元610还用于向网络设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足第一准则。
在某些实施例中，该第二指示信息作为单独的信令向网络设备发送，可以通过收发单元610辅助信息消息来发送给网络设备，也可以通过MAC CE信息发送给网络设备。该第二指示信息用于指示第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足第一准则，可选的，处理单元620可以对服务小区进行至少n次测量，并上报其中的满足第一准则的测量结果，该n次测量可以按照测量的时间进行排序，可选的，该处理单元620也可以对m个邻区进行测量，并上报其中的满足第一准则的测量结果。
在某些实施例中，该第二指示信息包括在处理单元620的测量报告中向网络设备发送。可选的，处理单元620可以对服务小区进行至少n次测量，并上报其中的满足第一准则的测量结果，该n次测量可以按照测量的时间进行排序，可选的，该处理单元620也可以对m个邻区进行测量，并上报其中的满足第一准则的测量结果。
在某些实施例中，收发单元610也可以上报不满足第一准则的测量结果。
该收发单元610还用于接收网络设备发送第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示处理单元620进入测量放松状态。
在一些实施例中，该通信装置600可以是上文方法实施例200中的网络设备，也可以是用于实现上文方法实施例中网络设备的功能的芯片。应理解，该通信装置600可以对应于本申请实施例的方法200中的网络设备对应的步骤。该通信装置600包括：
收发单元610，用于向终端设备发送第一指示信息。
处理单元620，用于确定终端设备可以进入测量放松状态。
具体的，该第一指示信息用于指示第一参考信号类型。进一步的，该第一指示信息用于指示终端设备对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行第一判定，第一判定用于判定第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系是否满足第一准则。可选的，该第一指示信息还用于指示第一阈值，或者，偏置量信息。需要说明的是，若第一指示信息用 于指示偏置量信息，则可能终端设备在空闲态或非激活态已经收到过一次阈值信息，终端设备在该阈值信息的基础上结合偏置量信息用于后续的判断。可选的，该第一阈值可以为终端设备进入连接态时重新配置的第一阈值，可选的，该第一阈值可以为终端设备在空闲态时的阈值，终端设备默认使用该空闲态时的阈值继续用于判断。
具体的，该第一参考信号类型可以包括同步信号块(Synchronization Signal Block，SSB)，信道状态信息参考信号(Channel State Information-Reference Signal，CSI-RS)。需要说明的是，当终端设备处于空闲态或非激活态时，终端设备可以被配置SSB信号，当终端设备处于连接态时，终端设备可以被配置SSB信号和/或CSI-RS信号。
需要说明的是，在空闲态或非激活态时，终端设备对SSB信号进行测量，在连接态时，终端设备可以对SSB信号进行测量，终端设备也可以对CSI-RS信号进行测量。
在某些实施例中，当终端设备处于连接态时，该第一指示信息可以通过广播或专用信令单独发送，该专用信令可以为无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control，RRC)重配置消息，或媒体接入控制(Medium Access Control,MAC)控制元素(Control Element，CE)MAC CE等消息，本申请实施例对此不做特别限定。
在某些实施例中，当终端设备处于连接态时，该第一指示信息可以包括在测量配置信息或者上报配置中，该第一指示信息指示的内容可以以基于事件触发上报或者周期性上报的事件被定义在上报列表中。该第一指示信息也可以承载在RRC重配置消息中。
在某些实施例中，该第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型可以为隐式的指示，例如，该终端设备在连接态时，终端设备收到的测量配置信息中全部都是指示终端设备使用SSB信号进行测量或上报时，终端设备未收到该第一指示信息但默认使用SSB信号进行用于第一判定的测量，或者，该终端设备在连接态时，终端设备收到的测量配置信息中全部都是指示终端设备使用CSI-RS信号进行测量或者上报时，终端设备未收到第一指示信息但默认使用CSI-RS信号进行用于第一判定的测量。需要说明的是，该测量配置信息中配置了其他方面的测量需求。再例如，该终端设备在连接态时，默认使用SSB信号进行用于第一判定的测量，不需要网络设备发送第一指示信息进行第一参考信号类型的指示。需要说明的是，若接收到第一指示信息，则不采用默认的SSB信号进行第一判定的测量，对应的，根据第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型对该类型的参考信号进行第一判定的测量。再例如，该终端设备在空闲态或者非激活态时，网络设备向终端设备广播第一指示信息，可选的，该第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型为SSB信号，可选的，该第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS信号。对应的，当终端设备由空闲态或者非激活态进入连接态时，可以根据空闲态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型继续进行测量。
具体的，该第一准则可以包括静止准则，不在小区边缘准则。需要说明的是，该静止准则和不在小区边缘准则可以从一定程度上评估终端设备的大概位置和移动性信息。
具体的，该第一测量值和第一阈值(或第一阈值的偏置量)的关系满足静止准则，则第一参考信号类型的参考信号的第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足下列关系：
对于第一参考信号类型为SSB信号：
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)<S SearchDeltaP，其中，S SearchDeltaP是与SSB信号相对应的第一阈值，Srxlev 为当前服务小区的参考信号接收功率(Reference Signal Receiving Power，RSRP)质量，即第一测量值，Srxlev Ref为当前服务小区的参考RSRP质量。
对于第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS信号：
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)<S SearchDeltaPCSI，或者，
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)<S SearchDeltaP+offset CSI，其中，S SearchDeltaPCSI为在连接态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一阈值，S SearchDeltaP为空闲态或非激活态时收到的阈值，在某些实施例中，该阈值为SSB信号的阈值，offset CSI为在连接态时收到的偏置量。具体的，阈值与偏置量的名称在本申请实施例中只表示一种名称的示例，也可以使用其他名称，本申请实施例对此不做限定。
具体的，该第一测量值和第一阈值(或第一阈值的偏置量)的关系满足不在小区边缘准则，则第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足下列关系：
对于第一参考信号类型为SSB信号：
Srxlev>S searchThresholdP且，
Squal>S SearchThresholdQ,如果配置了S SearchThresholdQ。其中，S searchThresholdP为第一阈值，
S SearchThresholdQ也为第一阈值，Srxlev为当前服务小区的RSRP质量，Squal为当前服务小
区的参考RSRQ质量。
对于第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS信号：
Srxlev>S SearchThresholdP+offset CSI,且，
Squal>S SearchThresholdQ+offset CSI，如果配置了S SearchThresholdQ，
或者，
Srxlev>S SearchThresholdPCSI,且,
Squal>S SearchThresholdQCSI,如果配置了S SearchThresholdQCSI。其中，S SearchThresholdP和S SearchThresholdQ为空闲态或非激活态时收到的阈值，在某些实施例中，该阈值为SSB信号的阈值，offset CSI为在连接态时收到的偏置量，S SearchDeltaPCSI、S SearchThresholdQCSI为在连接态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一阈值。
需要说明的是，在某些实施例中，终端设备在空闲态时根据广播的SSB信号的阈值进行第一判定，当终端设备由空闲态进入连接态时，网络设备可以指示终端设备测量的参考信号的类型为SSB信号或CSI-RS信号，当指示测量的信号为SSB信号时，可以延用空闲态时的SSB信号的阈值，也可以重新指示SSB信号的第一阈值，当指示测量的信号为CSI-RS信号时，可以在空闲态的SSB信号的阈值的基础上，指示偏置量，也可以重新指示CSI-RS信号的第一阈值，本申请对此不做特别的限定。需要说明的是，在某些情况下，网络设备也可以指示终端设备测量是否满足其他准则，本申请对此不做限定。可选的，该其他准则可以辅助网络设备判断是否使终端设备进入测量放松状态。
该收发单元610还用于接收终端设备发送的第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足第一准则。
在某些实施例中，该第二指示信息作为单独的信令向收发单元610发送，可以通过终 端设备辅助信息消息来发送给收发单元610，也可以通过MAC CE信息发送给收发单元610。该第二指示信息用于指示第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足第一准则，可选的，终端设备可以对服务小区进行至少n次测量，并上报其中的满足第一准则的测量结果，该n次测量可以按照测量的时间进行排序，可选的，该终端设备也可以对m个邻区进行测量，并上报其中的满足第一准则的测量结果。
在某些实施例中，终端设备上报n个服务小区的测量结果，这n个服务小区的测量结果可以为满足准则的n个结果，或者，满足准则后，上报的n个测量结果中包含不满足准则的测量结果。
在某些实施例中，当满足第一准则后，终端设备上报m个邻区测量结果。上报所述结果可以使得网络设备获取终端设备的更多信息，来判断是否准许终端进行测量放松。
在某些实施例中，该第二指示信息包括在终端设备的测量报告中向收发单元610发送。可选的，终端设备可以对服务小区进行n次测量，并上报其中的满足第一准则的测量结果，该n次测量可以按照测量的时间进行排序，可选的，该终端设备也可以对m个邻区进行测量，并上报其中的满足第一准则的测量结果。
在某些实施例中，终端设备也可以上报不满足第一准则的测量结果。
在另一种实施方式中，对于空闲态的静止准则或者不在小区边缘准则，连接态的终端也可以使用或者复用。具体的，基站在发送系统消息时，可以发送一个指示信息，用于指示终端进入连接态后，是否使用空闲态配置的准则或者参数，来评估是否满足静止准则，以及可以进行后续上报流程。
另一种方式为，基站在消息4或者RRC重配中发送指示信息给终端，指示是否使用广播中静止准则。
若满足可以在UE辅助信息中上报，或者测量报告中上报。
该收发单元610还用于向终端设备发送第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示终端设备进入测量放松状态。
需要说明的是，该步骤为可选的，若处理单元620根据第二指示信息判定终端设备不能进入测量放松状态，则网络设备可以不向终端设备发送第三指示信息。
具体的，收发单元610接收第二指示信息，可选的，处理单元620根据第二指示信息中对服务小区的测量结果对终端设备的大概位置以及移动性信息进行评估，可选的，处理单元620根据第二指示信息中对邻区的测量结果，判断终端设备是否可能会发生切换。
具体的，处理单元620根据第二指示信息确定终端设备可以进行测量放松时，向终端设备发送第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示终端设备进入测量放松状态。该第三指示信息可以为RRC消息，例如，RRC重配置消息，也可以为MAC CE消息等。
应理解，该测量放松的内容可以为频率测量放松、小区测量放松、周期测量放松等。具体的，第三指示信息可以包含：需要测量的频率，或者，需要测量放松的频率，或者，需要测量的小区，或者，需要测量昂送的小区，或者测量的周期(如周期为秒，分，时等)。换句话说，终端设备进入测量放松状态以后，可以对周期进行测量放松，处理单元620可以指示终端设备测量的周期放松，作为示例而非限定，原测量周期为每5分钟测量一次，进入测量放松状态以后，测量周期可以为每10分钟测量一次。终端设备进入测量放松状态以后，可以对某个频率进行测量放松，作为示例而非限定，终端设备可以对该频率不进 行测量。终端设备进入测量放松状态以后，可以对某个小区进行测量放松，作为示例而非限定，终端设备可以对该小区不进行测量。需要说明的是，终端设备进入测量放松状态的内容也可以为以上三种的组合，作为示例而非限定，网络设备可以指示终端设备对于某个小区A，测量的周期为20分钟一次，对某个小区B，测量的周期为10分钟一次，该测量放松的内容可以由处理单元620的第三指示信息进行具体指示，也可以由第三指示信息指示进入测量放松状态而由终端设备侧默认测量放松的内容。该第三指示信息可以为RRC重配消息。
可选的，终端设备使用SSB信号进行测量或使用CSI-RS信号进行测量，收到第三指示信息，对两种类型的参考信号对应的相关测量都可以进行测量放松。可选的，终端设备使用SSB信号进行测量，收到第三指示信息，对SSB信号对应的相关测量进行测量放松。可选的，终端设备使用CSI-RS信号进行测量，收到第三指示信息，对CSI-RS信号对应的相关测量进行测量放松。
在某些实施例中，第三指示信息，可以携带测量ID、测量对象ID等，用于指示对该ID对应的测量对象进行返送。也可以指示对哪种参考信号进行测量放松。
在一些实施例中，该通信装置600可以是上文方法实施例300中的终端设备，也可以是用于实现上文方法实施例中终端设备的功能的芯片。应理解，该通信装置600可以对应于本申请实施例的方法300中的终端设备对应的步骤。该通信装置600包括：
收发单元610，用于接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息。
处理单元620，在连接态时根据第一指示信息对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量，获取第一测量值。
具体的，该第一指示信息用于指示第一参考信号类型。
具体的，该第一参考信号类型可以包括同步信号块(Synchronization SignalBlock，SSB)，信道状态信息参考信号(Channel State Information-Reference Signal，CSI-RS)。需要说明的是，当通信装置处于空闲态或非激活态时，处理单元620可以被配置SSB信号，当通信装置处于连接态时，处理单元620可以被配置SSB信号和/或CSI-RS信号。
需要说明的是，在空闲态或非激活态时，处理单元620对SSB信号进行测量，在连接态时，处理单元620可以对SSB信号进行测量，处理单元620也可以对CSI-RS信号进行测量。
具体的，该第一指示信息可以用于指示处理单元620需要对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行第一判定，该第一判定为处理单元620需要判定第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系是否满足第一准则。
在某些实施例中，该通信装置在连接态时，网络设备向收发啊单元610发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息可以是通过广播消息发送，也可以是通过专用信令发送，例如，无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control，RRC)重配置消息，或者，媒体接入控制(Medium Access Control,MAC)控制元素(Control Element，CE)MAC CE等，本申请实施例对此不做限定。该第一指示信息用于指示处理单元620对SSB信号进行测量，或对CSI-RS信号进行测量，或对其他可能的类型的参考信号进行测量，需要说明的是，该测量用于进行第一判定。
在某些实施例中，该通信装置在连接态时，收发单元610收到的测量配置信息中全部 都是指示处理单元620使用SSB信号进行测量或上报时，收发单元610未收到该第一指示信息但处理单元620默认使用SSB信号进行用于第一判定的测量，或者，该通信装置在连接态时，收发单元610收到的测量配置信息中全部都是指示处理单元620使用CSI-RS信号进行测量或者上报时，收发单元610未收到第一指示信息但处理单元620默认使用CSI-RS信号进行用于第一判定的测量。需要说明的是，该测量配置信息中配置了其他方面的测量需求。
在某些实施例中，该通信装置在连接态时，默认使用SSB信号进行用于第一判定的测量，不需要网络设备发送第一指示信息进行第一参考信号类型的指示。
在某些实施例中，该通信装置在空闲态或者非激活态时，网络设备向收发单元610广播第一指示信息，可选的，该第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型为SSB信号，可选的，该第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS信号。对应的，当通信装置由空闲态或者非激活态进入连接态时，可以根据空闲态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型继续进行测量。
需要说明的是，在本申请实施例中，通信装置侧协议进行了适应性修改，使得收发单元610收到该第一指示信息即进行第一判定的测量和判定，而不需要专门的测量配置信息进行配置。
应理解，该第一指示信息还可以用于指示第一阈值，或者，偏置量信息，需要说明的是，若第一指示信息用于指示偏置量信息，则可能通信装置在空闲态或非激活态已经收到过一次阈值信息，终端设备在该阈值信息的基础上结合偏置量信息用于后续的判断。可选的，该第一阈值可以为通信装置进入连接态时重新配置的第一阈值，可选的，该第一阈值可以为通信装置在空闲态时的阈值。
在一种可能的实现方式中，当通信装置在连接态时，网络设备向收发单元610发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息指示第一阈值，或者，该第一指示信息指示第一阈值的偏置量，该第一阈值，或该第一偏置量是SSB信号相关的第一阈值或偏置量，则处理单元620默认对SSB信号进行用于第一判定的测量，若该第一阈值，或该第一阈值的偏置量是CSI-RS相关的第一阈值或偏置量，则处理单元620默认对CSI-RS信号进行用于第一判定的测量。在该实现方式中，可以不需要单独指示第一信号类型。
该处理单元620还用于连接态时根据第一指示信息对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量，获取第一测量值。
具体的，收发单元610接收第一指示信息，确定用于进行第一判定的第一参考信号类型，处理单元620对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量。
处理单元620可以对服务小区进行至少n次测量，该n大于或等于1。
处理单元620可以对服务小区的至少m个邻区进行测量，该m大于或等于1。
该处理单元620该根据第一测量值和第一阈值确定第一判定的结果。
具体的，处理单元620对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量，获取第一测量值，处理单元620判定该第一测量值和第一阈值的关系是否满足第一准则，该第一准则可以包括静止准则，不在小区边缘准则。需要说明的是，该静止准则和不在小区边缘准则可以从一定程度上评估通信装置的大概位置和移动性信息。
需要说明的是，第一测量值和第一阈值的关系满足第一准则需要满足的关系式可以参 见方法200中终端设备的描述，在此不做赘述。
该收发单元610还用于向网络设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一判定的结果。
在某些实施例中，终端设备判定第一测量量和第一阈值的关系满足第一准则，收发单元610向网络设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一测量量和第一阈值的关系满足第一准则，可选的，处理单元620可以对服务小区进行n次测量，并上报其中的满足第一准则的测量结果，该n次测量可以按照测量的时间进行排序，可选的，该终端设备也可以对m个邻区进行测量，并上报其中的满足第一准则的测量结果。
在某些实施例中，终端设备判定第一测量量和第一阈值的关系不满足第一准则，终端设备向网络设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一测量量和第一阈值的关系不满足第一准则，可选的，处理单元620可以对服务小区进行n次测量，并上报其中的不满足第一准则的测量结果，该n次测量可以按照测量的时间进行排序，可选的，该处理单元620也可以对m个邻区进行测量，并上报其中的不满足第一准则的测量结果，其中，m，n为正整数。
在某些实施例中，处理单元620判定第一测量量和第一阈值的关系是否满足第一准则，收发单元610向网络设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一测量量和第一阈值的关系是否满足第一准则，可选的，处理单元620可以对服务小区进行n次测量，并上报该n次测量结果，可选的，该处理单元620也可以对多个邻区进行测量，并上报该小区质量最好的m个邻区的测量结果是否满足第一准则，其中，m，n为正整数。
需要说明的是，该第二指示信息可以通过通信设备辅助信息消息来发送给网络设备，也可以通过MAC CE信息发送给网络设备。
需要说明的是，收发单元610向网络设备发送第二指示信息以后，没有收到网络设备发送的第三指示信息，则收发单元610可以等待第一时间以后再次发送第二指示信息，该第一时间可以是网络设备之前向收发单元610发送的，也可以是收发单元610默认的或预配置的或协议规定的。可选的，收发单元610也可以进行L次上报以后，依然没有收到网络设备的第三指示信息后，则停止向网络设备发送第二指示信息，该L的大小可以为网络设备之前向收发单元610发送的，也可以为收发单元610默认的，收发单元610停止发送第二指示信息以后，若再次收到第一指示信息，则处理单元620再次进行测量并根据判断结果发送第二指示信息。
可选的，收发单元610上报指示信息之前，网络设备可以向处理单元620配置满足第一准则后上报的最大次数L，当处理单元620发现满足第一准则后，开始向网络设备发送第二指示信息，发送周期为网络设备配置的或处理单元620默认的配置。具体的，若在发送配置过程中收到放松指示信息，则瘦啊单元610停止发送第二指示信息，并开始测量放松。收发单元610上报的L次测量结果可以均是满足第一准则的，也可能出现不满足的情况。
可选的，收发单元610向网络设备发送第二指示信息以后，没有收到网络设备发送的第三指示信息，则处理单元620可以启动定时器，当定时器超时后，再次判断是否满足第一准则，若满足则再次发送第二指示信息，若不满足则不需要发送。该定时器可以是网络设备之前向收发单元610发送的，也可以是协议规定的。
该收发单元610还用于接收网络设备发送的第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示终端设备进入测量放松状态。
应理解，该测量放松的内容可以为频率测量放松、小区测量放松、周期测量放松等。换句话说，处理单元620进入测量放松状态以后，可以对周期进行测量放松，网络设备可以指示处理单元620测量的周期放松，作为示例而非限定，原测量周期为每5分钟测量一次，进入测量放松状态以后，测量周期可以为每10分钟测量一次。处理单元620进入测量放松状态以后，可以对某个频率进行测量放松，作为示例而非限定，处理单元620可以对该频率不进行测量。处理单元620进入测量放松状态以后，可以对某个小区进行测量放松，作为示例而非限定，处理单元620可以对该小区不进行测量。需要说明的是，处理单元620进入测量放松状态的内容也可以为以上三种的组合，作为示例而非限定，网络设备可以指示处理单元620对于某个小区A，测量的周期为20分钟一次，对某个小区B，测量的周期为10分钟一次，该测量放松的内容可以由网络设备的第三指示信息进行具体指示，也可以由第三指示信息指示进入测量放松状态而由处理单元620默认测量放松的内容。
可选的，处理单元620使用SSB信号进行测量或使用CSI-RS信号进行测量，收到第三指示信息，对两种类型的参考信号对应的相关测量都可以进行测量放松。可选的，处理单元620使用SSB信号进行测量，收到第三指示信息，对SSB信号对应的相关测量进行测量放松。可选的，处理单元620使用CSI-RS信号进行测量，收到第三指示信息，对CSI-RS信号对应的相关测量进行测量放松。
该处理单元620还用于结束测量放松状态。
可选的，处理单元620在测量放松状态时，发现测量量和第一阈值的关系不满足第一准则，可以向网络设备发送第四指示信息，具体的，该第四指示信息可以指示测量量和第一阈值的关系不满足第一准则，该测量量可以为第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型对应的测量量，也可以为处理单元620自己随机测量的类型的参考信号的测量量，本申请对此不做限定。可选的，收发单元610发送第四指示信息可以自己决定结束测量放松状态，也可以等待网络设备的第五指示信息，该第五指示信息用于指示处理单元620结束测量放松状态。
可选的，上述步骤中，网络设备发送的第三指示信息中可以包括定时器的配置，该定时器的配置也可以为处理单元620默认的，收发单元610收到第三指示信息以后，进入测量放松状态的同时启动该定时器，当定时器达到第一时长以后，处理单元620结束测量放松状态。需要说明的是，若在第一时长内，处理单元620发现测量量和第一阈值的关系不满足第一准则，可以向网络设备发送第四指示信息，自行决定结束测量放松状态或等待网络设备的第五指示信息结束测量放松状态。
可选的，上述步骤中，网络设备发送的第三指示信息中可以包括定时器配置，该定时器的配置也可以为处理单元620默认的。收发单元610收到第三指示信息以后，进入测量放松状态的同时启动该定时器，在该定时器达到第一时长之前，处理单元620发现测量量和第一阈值的关系不满足第一准则，也不向网络设备发送第四指示信息，当该定时器达到第一时长，收发单元610向网络设备发送第四指示信息，自行决定结束测量放松状态或等待网络设备的第五指示信息结束测量放松状态。
需要说明的是，在网络设备侧，在处理单元620测量放松状态期间，网络设备收到第 四指示信息，或者，网络设备判断负载均衡时，或者，根据收发单元610上报的测量结果，判定网络设备不需要进行测量放松时，可以向收发单元发送第五指示信息，指示处理单元620结束测量放松状态。该第五指示信息可以为专用的RRC消息，也可以为MAC CE消息等。
在一些实施例中，该通信装置600可以是上文方法实施例300中的网络设备，也可以是用于实现上文方法实施例中网络设备的功能的芯片。应理解，该通信装置600可以对应于本申请实施例的方法300中的网络设备对应的步骤。该通信装置600包括：
收发单元610，向终端设备发送第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示第一参考信号类型。
处理单元620，用于根据第二指示信息确定终端设备可以进入测量放松状态。
具体的，该第一参考信号类型可以包括同步信号块(Synchronization Signal Block，SSB)，信道状态信息参考信号(Channel State Information-Reference Signal，CSI-RS)。需要说明的是，当终端设备处于空闲态或非激活态时，终端设备可以被配置SSB信号，当终端设备处于连接态时，终端设备可以被配置SSB信号和CSI-RS信号。
需要说明的是，在空闲态或非激活态时，终端设备对SSB信号进行测量，在连接态时，终端设备可以对SSB信号进行测量，终端设备也可以对CSI-RS信号进行测量。
具体的，该第一指示信息可以用于指示终端设备需要对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行第一判定，该第一判定为终端设备需要判定第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系是否满足第一准则。
在某些实施例中，该终端设备在连接态时，收发单元610向终端设备发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息可以是通过广播消息发送，也可以是通过专用信令发送，例如，无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control，RRC)重配置消息，或者，媒体接入控制(Medium Access Control,MAC)控制元素(Control Element，CE)MAC CE等，本申请实施例对此不做限定。该第一指示信息用于指示终端设备对SSB信号进行测量，或对CSI-RS信号进行测量，或对其他可能的类型的参考信号进行测量，需要说明的是，该测量用于进行第一判定。
在某些实施例中，该终端设备在连接态时，终端设备收到的测量配置信息中全部都是指示终端设备使用SSB信号进行测量或上报时，终端设备未收到该第一指示信息但默认使用SSB信号进行用于第一判定的测量，或者，该终端设备在连接态时，终端设备收到的测量配置信息中全部都是指示终端设备使用CSI-RS信号进行测量或者上报时，终端设备未收到第一指示信息但默认使用CSI-RS信号进行用于第一判定的测量。需要说明的是，该测量配置信息中配置了其他方面的测量需求。
在某些实施例中，该终端设备在连接态时，默认使用SSB信号进行用于第一判定的测量，不需要网络设备发送第一指示信息进行第一参考信号类型的指示。
在某些实施例中，该终端设备在空闲态或者非激活态时，收发单元610向终端设备广播第一指示信息，可选的，该第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型为SSB信号，可选的，该第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS信号。对应的，当终端设备由空闲态或者非激活态进入连接态时，可以根据空闲态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型继续进行测量。
需要说明的是，在本申请实施例中，终端设备侧协议进行了适应性修改，使得终端设 备收到该第一指示信息即进行第一判定的测量和判定，而不需要专门的测量配置信息进行配置。
应理解，该第一指示信息还可以用于指示第一阈值，或者，偏置量信息，需要说明的是，若第一指示信息用于指示偏置量信息，则可能终端设备在空闲态或非激活态已经收到过一次阈值信息，终端设备在该阈值信息的基础上结合偏置量信息用于后续的判断。可选的，该第一阈值可以为终端设备进入连接态时重新配置的第一阈值，可选的，该第一阈值可以为终端设备在空闲态时的阈值。
在一种可能的实现方式中，当终端设备在连接态时，收发单元610向终端设备发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息指示第一阈值，或者，该第一指示信息指示第一阈值的偏置量，该第一阈值，或该第一偏置量是SSB信号相关的第一阈值或偏置量，则终端设备默认对SSB信号进行用于第一判定的测量，若该第一阈值，或该第一阈值的偏置量是CSI-RS相关的第一阈值或偏置量，则终端设备默认对CSI-RS信号进行用于第一判定的测量。在该实现方式中，可以不需要单独指示第一信号类型。
该收发单元610还用于接收终端设备发送的第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一判定的结果。
在某些实施例中，终端设备判定第一测量量和第一阈值的关系满足第一准则，终端设备向收发单元610发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一测量量和第一阈值的关系满足第一准则，可选的，终端设备可以对服务小区进行n次测量，并上报其中的满足第一准则的测量结果，该n次测量可以按照测量的时间进行排序，可选的，该终端设备也可以对m个邻区进行测量，并上报其中的满足第一准则的测量结果。
在某些实施例中，终端设备判定第一测量量和第一阈值的关系不满足第一准则，终端设备向收发单元610发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一测量量和第一阈值的关系不满足第一准则，可选的，终端设备可以对服务小区进行n次测量，并上报其中的不满足第一准则的测量结果，该n次测量可以按照测量的时间进行排序，可选的，该终端设备也可以对m个邻区进行测量，并上报其中的不满足第一准则的测量结果。
在某些实施例中，终端设备判定第一测量量和第一阈值的关系是否满足第一准则，终端设备向收发单元610发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一测量量和第一阈值的关系是否满足第一准则，可选的，终端设备可以对服务小区进行n次测量，并上报该n次测量结果中的每一次是否满足第一准则，该n次测量可以按照测量的时间进行排序，可选的，该终端设备也可以对m个邻区进行测量，并上报该m个邻区的测量结果是否满足第一准则。
需要说明的是，该第二指示信息可以通过终端设备辅助信息消息来发送给收发单元610，也可以通过MAC CE信息发送给收发单元610。
需要说明的是，终端设备向收发单元610发送第二指示信息以后，没有收到收发单元610发送的第三指示信息，则终端设备可以等待第一时间以后再次发送第二指示信息，该第一时间可以是收发单元610之前向终端设备发送的，也可以是终端设备默认的。可选的，终端设备也可以进行L次上报以后，依然没有收到收发单元610的第三指示信息后，则停止向收发单元610发送第二指示信息，该L的大小可以为网络设备之前向终端设备发送的，也可以为终端设备默认的，终端设备停止发送第二指示信息以后，若再次收到第一指示信 息，则终端设备再次进行测量并根据判断结果发送第二指示信息。
该收发单元610还用于向终端设备发送第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示终端设备进入测量放松状态。
需要说明的是，该步骤为可选的，若处理单元620根据第二指示信息判定终端设备不能进入测量放松状态，则收发单元610可以不向终端设备发送第三指示信息。
具体的，收发单元610接收第二指示信息，可选的，处理单元620根据第二指示信息中对服务小区的测量结果对终端设备的大概位置以及移动性信息进行评估，可选的，处理单元620根据第二指示信息中对邻区的测量结果，判断终端设备是否可能会发生切换。
具体的，处理单元620根据第二指示信息确定终端设备可以进行测量放松时，向终端设备发送第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示终端设备进入测量放松状态。该第三指示信息可以为RRC消息，例如，RRC重配置消息，也可以为MAC CE消息等。
应理解，该测量放松的内容可以为频率测量放松、小区测量放松、周期测量放松等。换句话说，终端设备进入测量放松状态以后，可以对周期进行测量放松，处理单元620可以指示终端设备测量的周期放松，作为示例而非限定，原测量周期为每5分钟测量一次，进入测量放松状态以后，测量周期可以为每10分钟测量一次。终端设备进入测量放松状态以后，可以对某个频率进行测量放松，作为示例而非限定，终端设备可以对该频率不进行测量。终端设备进入测量放松状态以后，可以对某个小区进行测量放松，作为示例而非限定，终端设备可以对该小区不进行测量。需要说明的是，终端设备进入测量放松状态的内容也可以为以上三种的组合，作为示例而非限定，处理单元620可以指示终端设备对于某个小区A，测量的周期为20分钟一次，对某个小区B，测量的周期为10分钟一次，该测量放松的内容可以由网络设备的第三指示信息进行具体指示，也可以由第三指示信息指示进入测量放松状态而由终端设备侧默认测量放松的内容。
可选的，终端设备使用SSB信号进行测量或使用CSI-RS信号进行测量，收到第三指示信息，对两种类型的参考信号对应的相关测量都可以进行测量放松。可选的，终端设备使用SSB信号进行测量，收到第三指示信息，对SSB信号对应的相关测量进行测量放松。可选的，终端设备使用CSI-RS信号进行测量，收到第三指示信息，对CSI-RS信号对应的相关测量进行测量放松。
可选的，终端设备在测量放松状态时，发现测量量和第一阈值的关系不满足第一准则，可以向收发单元610发送第四指示信息，具体的，该第四指示信息可以指示测量量和第一阈值的关系不满足第一准则，该测量量可以为第一指示信息指示的第一参考信号类型对应的测量量，也可以为终端设备自己随机测量的类型的参考信号的测量量，本申请对此不做限定。可选的，终端设备发送第四指示信息可以自己决定结束测量放松状态，也可以等待收发单元610的第五指示信息，该第五指示信息用于指示终端设备结束测量放松状态。
可选的，在上述步骤中，收发单元610发送的第三指示信息中可以包括定时器的配置，该定时器的配置也可以为终端默认的，终端设备收到第三指示信息以后，进入测量放松状态的同时启动该定时器，当定时器达到第一时长以后，终端设备结束测量放松状态。需要说明的是，若在第一时长内，终端设备发现测量量和第一阈值的关系不满足第一准则，可以向收发单元610发送第四指示信息，自行决定结束测量放松状态或等待网络设备的第五指示信息结束测量放松状态。
可选的，在上述步骤中，收发单元610发送的第三指示信息中可以包括定时器配置，该定时器的配置也可以为终端默认的。终端设备收到第三指示信息以后，进入测量放松状态的同时启动该定时器，在该定时器达到第一时长之前，终端设备发现测量量和第一阈值的关系不满足第一准则，也不向收发单元610发送第四指示信息，当该定时器达到第一时长，终端设备向收发单元610发送第四指示信息，自行决定结束测量放松状态或等待收发单元610的第五指示信息结束测量放松状态。
需要说明的是，在通信装置侧，在终端设备测量放松状态期间，收发单元610收到第四指示信息，或者，处理单元620判断负载均衡时，或者，根据终端设备上报的测量结果，判定终端设备不需要进行测量放松时，可以向终端设备发送第五指示信息，指示终端设备结束测量放松状态。该第五指示信息可以为专用的RRC消息，也可以为MAC CE消息等。
在一些实施例中，该通信装置600可以是上文方法实施例400中的终端设备，也可以是用于实现上文方法实施例中终端设备的功能的芯片。应理解，该通信装置600可以对应于本申请实施例的方法400中的终端设备对应的步骤。该通信装置600包括：
收发单元610，用于接收网络设备发送的测量配置信息。
处理单元620，用于根据测量配置信息进行测量
具体的，该测量配置信息中测量对象列表，上报配置列表等。其中，每个测量对象都对应一个测量标识，每个上报配置都对应一个测量上报标识，每个测量标识关联一个测量对象标识和一个测量上报标识。处理单元620可以根据收到的测量标识，确定对应的测量对象和上报配置。
应理解，在测量对象列表中的每个测量对象中，配置了频率信息，小区信息，参考信号信息等中的至少一项。
在本申请实施例中，在上报配置列表中，定义了新的事件，该事件所指示的内容可以与方法300中第一指示信息指示的内容类似，该事件可以为：第一准则判断事件，具体包括：静止准则判断事件、不在小区边缘判断事件等。该配置可以为进入第一准则事件则上报，也可以为离开第一准则事件则上报，也可以定义为进入或离开第一准则事件都进行上报。可以定义静止准则事件对应的为第一事件，可以定义不在小区边缘准则事件对应为第二事件。网络设备在该事件配置中，指示处理单元620基于事件触发上报，或者周期性上报，也就是说，例如，当配置基于事件触发上报时，处理单元620进入第一事件或第二事件，则向网络设备上报，或，处理单元620离开第一事件或第二事件，则向网络设备上报，或处理单元620进入或离开第一事件或第二事件都上报。当配置周期性上报时，例如，收发单元610周期性的向网络设备上报进入第一事件或离开第一事件，或者，收发单元610周期性的向网络设备上报进入第二事件或离开第二事件。
该配置信息为进入第一事件则上报时，处理单元620判断满足以下公式则上报：
当第一参考信号类型为SSB，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为SSB：
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)<S SearchDeltaP，其中，S SearchDeltaP是与SSB信号相对应的第一阈值，Srxlev为当前服务小区的参考信号接收功率(Reference Signal Receiving Power，RSRP)质量，即第一测量值，Srxlev Ref为当前服务小区的参考RSRP质量。
当第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为CSI-RS：
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)<S SearchDeltaPCSI，或者，
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)<S SearchDeltaP+offset CSI，其中，S SearchDeltaPCSI为在连接态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一阈值，S SearchDeltaP为空闲态或非激活态时收到的阈值，在某些实施例中，该阈值为SSB信号的阈值，offset CSI为在连接态时收到的偏置量。
该配置信息为离开第一事件则上报时，处理单元620判断满足以下公式则上报：
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)>S SearchDeltaP，其中，S SearchDeltaP是与SSB信号相对应的第一阈值，Srxlev为当前服务小区的参考信号接收功率(Reference Signal Receiving Power，RSRP)质量，即第一测量值，Srxlev Ref为当前服务小区的参考RSRP质量。
当第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为CSI-RS：
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)>S SearchDeltaPCSI，或者，
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)>S SearchDeltaP+offset CSI，其中，S SearchDeltaPCSI为在连接态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一阈值，S SearchDeltaP为空闲态或非激活态时收到的阈值，在某些实施例中，该阈值为SSB信号的阈值，offset CSI为在连接态时收到的偏置量。
该配置信息为进入第二事件则上报时，处理单元620判断满足以下公式则上报：
当第一参考信号类型为SSB，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为SSB：
Srxlev>S searchThresholdP且，
Squal>S SearchThresholdQ,如果配置了S SearchThresholdQ。其中，S searchThresholdP为第一阈值，S SearchThresholdQ也为第一阈值，Srxlev为当前服务小区的RSRP质量，Squal为当前服务小区的参考RSRQ质量。
当第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为CSI-RS：
Srxlev>S SearchThresholdP+offset CSI,且，
Squal>S SearchThresholdQ+offset CSI，如果配置了S SearchThresholdQ，
或者，
Srxlev>S SearchThresholdPCSI,且,
Squal>S SearchThresholdQCSI,如果配置了S SearchThresholdQCSI。其中，S SearchThresholdP和S SearchThresholdQ为空闲态或非激活态时收到的阈值，在某些实施例中，该阈值为SSB信号的阈值，offset CSI为在连接态时收到的偏置量，S SearchDeltaPCSI、S SearchThresholdQCSI为在连接态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一阈值。
该配置信息为离开第二事件则上报时，处理单元620判断满足以下公式则上报：
当第一参考信号类型为SSB，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为SSB：
Srxlev<S searchThresholdP且，
Squal<S SearchThresholdQ,如果配置了S SearchThresholdQ。其中，S searchThresholdP为第一阈值，S SearchThresholdQ也为第一阈值，Srxlev为当前服务小区的RSRP质量，Squal为当前服务小区的参考RSRQ质量。
当第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为CSI-RS：
Srxlev<S SearchThresholdP+offset CSI,且，
Squal<S SearchThresholdQ+offset CSI，如果配置了S SearchThresholdQ，
或者，
Srxlev<S SearchThresholdPCSI,且,
Squal<S SearchThresholdQCSI,如果配置了S SearchThresholdQCSI。其中，S SearchThresholdP和 S SearchThresholdQ为空闲态或非激活态时收到的阈值，在某些实施例中，该阈值为SSB信号的阈值，offset CSI为在连接态时收到的偏置量，S SearchDeltaPCSI、S SearchThresholdQCSI为在连接态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一阈值。
需要说明的是，在该事件的配置中，可以包括第一参考信息类型的配置，用于指示使用哪种参考信号，该第一参考信号类型包括：SSB，CSI-RS，关于该第一参考信号类型的描述具体可参见方法300。也可以为默认，从该配置信息的事件定义中默认该第一参考信号的类型。
需要说明的是，在该事件的配置中，可以指示上报邻区的测量结果，也可以指示上报服务小区的测量结果，具体可参见方法300。
需要说明的是，在网络设备向终端设备发送测量配置信息之前，终端设备可以在于网络设备建立RRC连接之后，向网络设备指示终端设备的能力信息，该能力信息可以包括窄带终端能力，和/或，支持连接态测量放松的能力等，本申请对此不做特别限定。网络设备网络设备网络设备网络设备网络设备网络设备网络设备处理单元620根据测量配置信息中的第一参考信号类型对邻区或者服务小区的参考信号进行测量。
该收发单元610还用于进行测量上报。
具体的，处理单元620根据测量结果判断是否满足第一准则时间，根据测量配置信息中的配置向网络设备进行测量上报。
该收发单元610还用于接收网络设备发送的第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示处理单元620进入测量放松状态。
具体的，若网络设备根据该收发单元610发送的测量上报消息，判断该处理单元620满足进入第一或者第二时间，则向收发单元610发送第三指示信息。该指示信息可以包括在重新发送的测量配置信息中，可选的，其体现形式可以为在测量配置信息中包含待测量的频率信息或小区列表信息，上述信息与收发单元610之前收到的测量配置信息相比，待测量的频率和小区数目更少，使得处理单元620可以测量更少的频率，或，更少的小区数目等，即相当于进入测量放松状态。可选的，其体现形式可以为在测量配置信息中，在带测量的频点信息或小区信息中，添加指示字段，用于指示处理单元620对该频率或者该小区是否进行测量放松。可选的，其体现形式可以为测量配置信息中，具体指示处理单元620测量放松的内容，该内容可以参见方法300中对应的装置的相关描述。第三指示信息可以横在在RRC重配消息中。
可选的，该指示信息也可以以一条单独的信息发送，指示处理单元620具体的测量放松的内容，具体描述可以参见方法300中对应的装置的相关描述
该处理单元620还用于确定结束测量放松状态。
在本申请实施例中，处理单元620测量放松状态测量后发现满足离开第一事件或离开第二事件，可以向网络设备上报离开第一事件或第二事件，也可以单独向网络设备发送指示信息，指示离开第一事件或第二事件。处理单元620可以自行决定停止放松并向网络设备发送测量上报消息，用于通知网络设备该处理单元620离开第一或第二事件。
可选的，也可以收到网络设备发送的停止测量放松后，在停止进行测量放松。网络设备发送的停止测量放松指示可以包含在RRC重配置，也可以是在MAC CE中。可以针对某一小区或者频率或者某一测量对象等进行指示。
可参见方法300对应的相关装置的描述。
在一些实施例中，该通信装置600可以是上文方法实施例400中的网络设备，也可以是用于实现上文方法实施例中网络设备的功能的芯片。应理解，该通信装置600可以对应于本申请实施例的方法400中的网络设备对应的步骤。该通信装置600包括：
收发单元610，用于向终端设备发送测量配置信息。
处理单元620，用于确定终端设备进入测量放松状态。
具体的，该测量配置信息中测量对象列表，上报配置列表等。其中，每个测量对象都对应一个测量标识，每个上报配置都对应一个测量上报标识，每个测量标识关联一个测量对象标识和一个测量上报标识。终端设备可以根据收到的测量标识，确定对应的测量对象和上报配置。
应理解，在测量对象列表中的每个测量对象中，配置了频率信息，小区信息，参考信号信息等中的至少一项。
在本申请实施例中，在上报配置列表中，定义了新的事件，该事件所指示的内容可以与方法300中第一指示信息指示的内容类似，该事件可以为：第一准则判断事件，具体包括：静止准则判断事件(第一事件)、不在小区边缘判断事件(第二事件)等。该配置可以为进入第一准则事件则上报，也可以为离开第一准则事件则上报，也可以定义为进入或离开第一准则事件都进行上报。可以定义静止准则事件对应的为第一事件，可以定义不在小区边缘准则事件对应为第二事件。处理单元620在该事件配置中，指示终端设备基于事件触发上报，或者周期性上报，也就是说，例如，当配置基于事件触发上报时，终端设备判断满足进入静止第一准则的事件或第二事件发生，则向网络设备上报，或，终端设备离开判断不满足静止第一准则的事件或第二事件发生，则向收发单元610上报，或终端设备进入或离开第一事件或第二事件都上报。当配置周期性上报时，例如，终端设备周期性的向收发单元610上报是否发生静止准则事件进入第一事件或离开第一事件，或者，终端设备周期性的向收发单元上报进入第二事件或离开第二事件。第一事件和第二事件都包含进入条件和离开条件，具体如上述实施例。
该配置信息为进入第一事件则上报时，终端设备判断满足以下公式则上报：
当第一参考信号类型为SSB，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为SSB：
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)<S SearchDeltaP，其中，S SearchDeltaP是与SSB信号相对应的第一阈值，Srxlev为当前服务小区的参考信号接收功率(Reference Signal Receiving Power，RSRP)质量，即第一测量值，Srxlev Ref为当前服务小区的参考RSRP质量。
当第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为CSI-RS：
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)<S SearchDeltaPCSI，或者，
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)<S SearchDeltaP+offset CSI，其中，S SearchDeltaPCSI为在连接态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一阈值，S SearchDeltaP为空闲态或非激活态时收到的阈值，在某些实施例中，该阈值为SSB信号的阈值，offset CSI为在连接态时收到的偏置量。
该配置信息为离开第一事件则上报时，终端设备判断满足以下公式则上报：
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)>S SearchDeltaP，其中，S SearchDeltaP是与SSB信号相对应的第一阈值，Srxlev为当前服务小区的参考信号接收功率(Reference Signal Receiving Power，RSRP)质量，即第一测量值，Srxlev Ref为当前服务小区的参考RSRP质量。
当第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为CSI-RS：
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)>S SearchDeltaPCSI，或者，
(Srxlev Ref–Srxlev)>S SearchDeltaP+offset CSI，其中，S SearchDeltaPCSI为在连接态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一阈值，S SearchDeltaP为空闲态或非激活态时收到的阈值，在某些实施例中，该阈值为SSB信号的阈值，offset CSI为在连接态时收到的偏置量。
该配置信息为进入第二事件则上报时，终端设备判断满足以下公式则上报：
当第一参考信号类型为SSB，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为SSB：
Srxlev>S searchThresholdP且，
Squal>S SearchThresholdQ,如果配置了S SearchThresholdQ。其中，S searchThresholdP为第一阈值，S SearchThresholdQ也为第一阈值，Srxlev为当前服务小区的RSRP质量，Squal为当前服务小区的参考RSRQ质量。
当第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为CSI-RS：
Srxlev>S SearchThresholdP+offset CSI,且，
Squal>S SearchThresholdQ+offset CSI，如果配置了S SearchThresholdQ，
或者，
Srxlev>S SearchThresholdPCSI,且,
Squal>S SearchThresholdQCSI,如果配置了S SearchThresholdQCSI。其中，S SearchThresholdP和S SearchThresholdQ为空闲态或非激活态时收到的阈值，在某些实施例中，该阈值为SSB信号的阈值，offset CSI为在连接态时收到的偏置量，S SearchDeltaPCSI、S SearchThresholdQCSI为在连接态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一阈值。
该配置信息为离开第二事件则上报时，终端设备判断满足以下公式则上报：
当第一参考信号类型为SSB，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为SSB：
Srxlev<S searchThresholdP且，
Squal<S SearchThresholdQ,如果配置了S SearchThresholdQ。其中，S searchThresholdP为第一阈值，S SearchThresholdQ也为第一阈值，Srxlev为当前服务小区的RSRP质量，Squal为当前服务小区的参考RSRQ质量。
当第一参考信号类型为CSI-RS，或，根据该事件给出的公式默认为CSI-RS：
Srxlev<S SearchThresholdP+offset CSI,且，
Squal<S SearchThresholdQ+offset CSI，如果配置了S SearchThresholdQ，
或者，
Srxlev<S SearchThresholdPCSI,且,
Squal<S SearchThresholdQCSI,如果配置了S SearchThresholdQCSI。其中，S SearchThresholdP和S SearchThresholdQ为空闲态或非激活态时收到的阈值，在某些实施例中，该阈值为SSB信号的阈值，offset CSI为在连接态时收到的偏置量，S SearchDeltaPCSI、S SearchThresholdQCSI为在连接态时收到的第一指示信息指示的第一阈值。
需要说明的是，在该事件的配置中，可以包括第一参考信息类型的配置，用于指示使用哪种参考信号，该第一参考信号类型包括：SSB，CSI-RS，关于该第一参考信号类型的描述具体可参见方法300。也可以为默认，从该配置信息的事件定义中默认该第一参考信号的类型。
需要说明的是，在该事件的配置中，可以指示上报邻区的测量结果，也可以指示上报服务小区的测量结果，具体可参见方法300。
需要说明的是，在收发单元610向终端设备发送测量配置信息之前，终端设备可以在于处理单元620建立RRC连接之后，向处理单元620指示终端设备的能力信息，该能力信息可以包括窄带终端能力，和/或，支持连接态测量放松的能力等，本申请对此不做特别限定。网络设备网络设备该收发单元610还用于接收终端设备的测量上报。
具体的，终端设备根据测量结果判断是否满足事件的触发条件，该触发条件可以为进入或离开第一事件，或进入或离开第二事件，根据上报配置中的配置向收发单元610进行测量上报消息，用于指示该终端满足进入或离开第一事件或者第二事件。
该收发单元610还用于向终端设备发送第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示终端设备进入测量放松状态。
具体的，若处理单元620根据终端设备发送的测量上报消息，判断该终端设备满足进入第一或者第二事件，则向终端发送第三指示消息，该指示信息可以包括在重新发送的测量配置信息中，可选的，其体现形式可以为在测量配置信息中包含待测量的频率信息或小区列表信息，上述信息与终端设备之前收到的测量配置信息相比，待测量的频率和小区数目更少，使得终端设备可以测量更少的频率，或，更少的小区数目等，即相当于进入测量放松状态。可选的，其体现形式可以为在测量配置信息中，在带测量的频点信息或小区信息中，添加指示字段，用于指示终端设备对该频率或者该小区需要进行测量放松。可选的，其体现形式可以为测量配置信息中，具体指示终端设备测量放松的内容，该内容可以参见方法300中对应的装置的相关描述。第三指示信息可以是承载在RRC重配消息中。
可选的，该指示信息也可以以一条单独的信息发送，指示终端设备具体的测量放松的内容，具体描述可以参见方法300中对应的装置的相关描述
该收发单元610还用于向终端设备发送指示结束测量放松状态的指示信息。
在本申请实施例中，终端设备测量放松状态测量后发现满足离开第一事件或离开第二事件，可以向收发单元610上报离开第一事件或第二事件，也可以单独向网络设备发送指示信息，指示离开第一事件或第二事件。终端设备可以自行决定停止放松并向收发单元610发送测量上报消息，用于通知处理单元620该终端设备离开第一或第二事件。
可选的，也可以收到收发单元610发送的停止测量放松后，在停止进行测量放松。收发单元610发送的停止测量放松指示可以包含在RRC重配置，也可以是在MAC CE中。可以针对某一小区或者频率或者某一测量对象等进行指示。
在一些实施例中，该通信装置600可以是上文方法实施例500中的终端设备，也可以是用于实现上文方法实施例中终端设备的功能的芯片。应理解，该通信装置600可以对应于本申请实施例的方法500中的终端设备对应的步骤。该通信装置600包括：
收发单元610，用于接收分布式单元发送的系统消息。
处理单元620，根据系统消息中的第信息确定第一小区禁止接入。
具体的，收发单元610接收系统消息中的第一消息，处理单元620根据自身的1R或2R能力，确定第一小区不能接入，进一步的，处理单元620根据第一信息执行同频或者异频的小区重选。
在一些实施例中，该通信装置600可以是上文方法实施例500中的分布式单元，也可 以是用于实现上文方法实施例中分布式单元的功能的芯片。应理解，该通信装置600可以对应于本申请实施例的方法500中的分布式单元对应的步骤。该通信装置600包括：
收发单元610，用于接收集中式单元发送的第一信息。
处理单元620，用于将第一信息添加到系统消息中。
该收发单元还用于向终端设备发送系统消息。
在一些实施例中，该通信装置600可以是上文方法实施例500中的集中式单元，也可以是用于实现上文方法实施例中集中式单元的功能的芯片。应理解，该通信装置600可以对应于本申请实施例的方法500中的集中式单元对应的步骤。该通信装置600包括：
收发单元610，用于向分布式单元发送第一信息。
处理单元620，用于确定终端设备禁止接入第一小区。
图7是本申请实施例的通信装置700的示意图，该通信装置700包括：收发器710、处理器720和存储器730。该存储器730，用于存储指令。该处理器720与存储器730耦合，用于执行存储器中存储的指令，以执行上述本申请实施例提供的方法。
具体的，该通信装置700中的收发器710可以对应于通信装置600中的收发单元610，该通信装置700中的处理器720可以对应于通信装置600中的处理单元620。
应理解，上述存储器730和处理器720可以合成一个处理装置，处理器720用于执行存储器730中存储的程序代码来实现上述功能。具体实现时，该存储器730也可以集成在处理器720中，或者独立于处理器720。
应理解，各收发器处理器执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储 在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (46)

  1. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述终端设备对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行第一判定，所述第一判定用于判定所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系是否满足第一准则；
    所述终端设备在连接态下根据所述第一指示信息对所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量，以获取第一测量值；
    所述终端设备向所述网络设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一测量值和所述第一阈值的关系满足所述第一准则。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述终端设备在连接态下进入测量放松状态。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息还用于指示所述第一阈值。
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一准则包括静止准则和/或不在小区边缘准则。
  5. 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一参考信号类型包括同步信号块SSB和/或信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS。
  6. 根据权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息或所述第三指示信息还用于指示所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号在测量放松状态下的测量配置，所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号在测量放松状态下的测量配置包括所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号在测量放松状态下的第一测量周期。
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息还用于指示所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号不在测量放松状态下的测量配置，所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号不在测量放松状态下的测量配置包括所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号不在测量放松状态下的第二测量周期。
  8. 根据权利要求6或7所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一测量周期大于所述第二测量周期。
  9. 根据权利要求1至7中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息包括在所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送的测量配置信息或上报配置信息中，或，
    所述第一指示信息由所述网络设备通过广播或专用信令向所述终端设备发送。
  10. 根据权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一判定用于判定所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系是否满足第一准则，包括：所述第一判定用于判定所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和所述第一阈值之间的关系在第一时间内满足所述第一准则，或，
    所述第一判定用于判定所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和所述第一阈值之间的关系在第二时间内不满足所述第一准则。
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一时间大于或等于所述第二时间。
  12. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述终端设备对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行第一判定，所述第一判定用于判定所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系是否满足第一准则；
    所述网络设备接收所述终端设备发送的第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示第一测量值和所述第一阈值的关系满足所述第一准则，所述第一测量值为所述终端设备在连接态下根据所述第一指示信息对所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量获取的。
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述终端设备在连接态下进入测量放松状态。
  14. 根据权利要求12或13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息还用于指示所述第一阈值。
  15. 根据权利要求12至14中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一准则包括静止准则和/或不在小区边缘准则。
  16. 根据权利要求12至15中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一参考信号类型包括同步信号块SSB和/或信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS。
  17. 根据权利要求12至16中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息或所述第三指示信息还用于指示所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号在测量放松状态下的测量配置，所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号在测量放松状态下的测量配置包括所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号在测量放松状态下的第一测量周期。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息还用于指示所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号不在测量放松状态下的测量配置，所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号不在测量放松状态下的测量配置包括所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号不在测量放松状态下的第二测量周期。
  19. 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一测量周期大于所述第二测量周期。
  20. 根据权利要求12至19中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息包括在所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送的测量配置信息或上报配置信息中，或，
    所述第一指示信息由所述网络设备通过广播或专用信令向所述终端设备发送。
  21. 根据权利要求12至20中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，其特征在于，所述第一判定用于判定所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系是否满足第一准则，包括：所述第一判定用于判定所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和所述第一阈值之间的关系在第一时间内满足所述第一准则，或，
    所述第一判定用于判定所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和所述第一阈值之间的关系在第二时间内不满足所述第一准则。
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一时间大于或等于所述第二时间。
  23. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    收发单元，用于接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示终端设备对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行第一判定，所述第一判定用于判定所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系是否满足第一准则；
    所述处理单元，用于在连接态下根据所述第一指示信息对所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量，以获取第一测量值；
    所述收发单元，还用于向所述网络设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一测量值和所述第一阈值的关系满足所述第一准则。
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元，还用于接收所述网络设备发送的第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述终端设备在连接态下进入测量放松状态。
  25. 根据权利要求23或24所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息还用于指示所述第一阈值。
  26. 根据权利要求23至25中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一准则包括静止准则和/或不在小区边缘准则。
  27. 根据权利要求23至26中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一参考信号类型包括同步信号块SSB和/或信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS。
  28. 根据权利要求23至27中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息或所述第三指示信息还用于指示所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号在测量放松状态下的测量配置，所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号在测量放松状态下的测量配置包括所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号在测量放松状态下的第一测量周期。
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息还用于指示所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号不在测量放松状态下的测量配置，所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号不在测量放松状态下的测量配置包括所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号不在测量放松状态下的第二测量周期。
  30. 根据权利要求28或29所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一测量周期大于所述第二测量周期。
  31. 根据权利要求23至29中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息包括在所述网络设备向所述收发单元发送的测量配置信息或上报配置信息中，或，
    所述第一指示信息由所述收发单元通过广播或专用信令向所述终端设备发送。
  32. 根据权利要求23至31中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一判定用于判定所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系是否满足第一准则，包括：所述第一判定用于判定所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和所述第一阈值之间的关系在第一时间内满足所述第一准则，或，
    所述第一判定用于判定所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和所述第一阈值之间的关系在第二时间内不满足所述第一准则。
  33. 根据权利要求32所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一时间大于或等于所述第二时间。
  34. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    收发单元，用于向终端设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述终端设备对第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行第一判定，所述第一判定用于判定所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系是否满足第一准则；
    所述收发单元，还用于接收所述终端设备发送的第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示第一测量值和所述第一阈值的关系满足所述第一准则，所述第一测量值为所述终端设备在连接态下根据所述第一指示信息对所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号进行测量获取的。
  35. 根据权利要求34所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元，还用于向所述终端设备发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述终端设备在连接态下进入测量放松状态。
  36. 根据权利要求34或35所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息还用于指示所述第一阈值。
  37. 根据权利要求34至36中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一准则包括静止准则和/或不在小区边缘准则。
  38. 根据权利要求34至37中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一参考信号类型包括同步信号块SSB和/或信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS。
  39. 根据权利要求34至38中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息或所述第三指示信息还用于指示所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号在测量放松状态下的测量配置，所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号在测量放松状态下的测量配置包括所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号在测量放松状态下的第一测量周期。
  40. 根据权利要求39所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息还用于指示所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号不在测量放松状态下的测量配置，所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号不在测量放松状态下的测量配置包括所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号不在测量放松状态下的第二测量周期。
  41. 根据权利要求39或40所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一测量周期大于所述第二测量周期。
  42. 根据权利要求34至41中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息包括在所述收发单元向所述终端设备发送的测量配置信息或上报配置信息中，或，
    所述第一指示信息由所述收发单元通过广播或专用信令向所述终端设备发送。
  43. 根据权利要求34至42中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，其特征在于，所述第一判定用于判定所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和第一阈值之间的关系是否满足第一准则，包括：所述第一判定用于判定所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和所述第一阈值之间的关系在第一时间内满足所述第一准则，或，
    所述第一判定用于判定所述第一参考信号类型的参考信号的测量值和所述第一阈值之间的关系在第二时间内不满足所述第一准则。
  44. 根据权利要求43所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一时间大于或等于所述第二时间。
  45. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读介质上存储有计算机指令，当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至22中任 意一项所述的通信方法。
  46. 一种芯片，其特征在于，包括处理器和存储器，所述存储器用于存储计算机程序，所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机介质，以执行如权利要求1至22中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2022/106433 2021-07-28 2022-07-19 通信方法和通信装置 WO2023005730A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110854658 2021-07-28
CN202110854658.9 2021-07-28
CN202111223091.1A CN115696392A (zh) 2021-07-28 2021-10-20 通信方法和通信装置
CN202111223091.1 2021-10-20

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023005730A1 true WO2023005730A1 (zh) 2023-02-02

Family

ID=85059653

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/106433 WO2023005730A1 (zh) 2021-07-28 2022-07-19 通信方法和通信装置

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115696392A (zh)
WO (1) WO2023005730A1 (zh)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170288763A1 (en) * 2016-04-04 2017-10-05 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for managing beam in beamforming system
CN111615119A (zh) * 2019-04-30 2020-09-01 维沃移动通信有限公司 测量方法、配置方法、终端及网络侧设备
CN111726817A (zh) * 2019-03-18 2020-09-29 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 一种信息处理方法、装置、设备及计算机可读存储介质
CN111800800A (zh) * 2019-08-15 2020-10-20 维沃移动通信有限公司 测量方法、终端设备和网络设备
CN112702756A (zh) * 2019-10-23 2021-04-23 维沃移动通信有限公司 Rlm调整和/或bfd调整的方法及设备

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170288763A1 (en) * 2016-04-04 2017-10-05 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for managing beam in beamforming system
CN111726817A (zh) * 2019-03-18 2020-09-29 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 一种信息处理方法、装置、设备及计算机可读存储介质
CN111615119A (zh) * 2019-04-30 2020-09-01 维沃移动通信有限公司 测量方法、配置方法、终端及网络侧设备
CN111800800A (zh) * 2019-08-15 2020-10-20 维沃移动通信有限公司 测量方法、终端设备和网络设备
CN112702756A (zh) * 2019-10-23 2021-04-23 维沃移动通信有限公司 Rlm调整和/或bfd调整的方法及设备

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
XIAOMI: "Discussion on relaxation of RLM/BFD measurements", 3GPP DRAFT; R4-2100725, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG4, no. Electronic Meeting; 20210125 - 20210205, 15 January 2021 (2021-01-15), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051969765 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115696392A (zh) 2023-02-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN109309969B (zh) 在rrc空闲模式下控制测量处理的方法及其装置
JP6617107B2 (ja) オン／オフ方式によるスモールセルにおける測定の支援
US9736725B2 (en) Method and apparatus for applying signaling of WLAN-3GPP interworking
KR101645267B1 (ko) 이동통신시스템에서 이동성이 낮은 아이들모드 디바이스의 통신을 위한 메저먼트 장치 및 방법
WO2015184379A2 (en) Enhancement for bss transition, load balancing and ap selection
JP2013524645A (ja) 低移動度状態およびプロシージャ
US9769693B2 (en) Method and apparatus of improving measurement reporting involving WLAN in a wireless communication system
US20220394532A1 (en) Ue power saving mechanism under early measurement reporting
WO2014017811A1 (ko) 무선 통신 시스템에서 ｃｓｉ－ｒｓ 측정 및 보고 방법과 이를 지원하는 장치
JP7222099B2 (ja) Ｒｒｍ測定の方法及びデバイス
WO2014098535A1 (ko) 무선 통신 시스템에서 통신 방법 및 이를 지원하는 장치
WO2020200120A1 (zh) 一种测量方法、设备及装置
US20230078923A1 (en) Method and apparatus for relaxed radio resource management measurement
WO2015038049A1 (en) Method for selecting an access network based on carrier aggregation information
US20220095134A1 (en) Method for Frequency Measurement and Related Apparatuses
EP2903221B1 (en) Method of performing traffic steering in a wireless network system and related wireless network system
US20230276324A1 (en) Cell Reselection-Related Information Associated with Network Slice or Closed Access Group For Wireless Networks
CN113316952A (zh) 新无线电未许可频谱中的切换改进
EP3328154B1 (en) Measurement reporting method for wireless local area network (wlan), and related device
WO2014121688A1 (zh) 一种wlan负载确定方法、装置及系统
WO2023005730A1 (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
WO2016089280A2 (en) Efficient communication of network identifiers
WO2023046190A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及通信装置
JP7471430B2 (ja) 無線デバイスが動作シナリオ間で遷移するときの遷移段階中の動作のためのシステムおよび方法
CN116233935A (zh) 多播广播mbs业务接续方法、装置、设备及存储介质

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22848335

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE